WO2019113746A1

WO2019113746A1 - Manual-focus prompt method, control apparatus, photography device, and controller

Info

Publication number: WO2019113746A1
Application number: PCT/CN2017/115484
Authority: WO
Inventors: 王晓丹
Original assignee: 深圳市大疆创新科技有限公司
Priority date: 2017-12-11
Filing date: 2017-12-11
Publication date: 2019-06-20
Also published as: CN109041590A; CN109041590B

Abstract

Provided are a manual-focus prompt method, control apparatus, photography device, and photography system, said method comprising: calculating a focus parameter peak value when a focus object in a current image is in focus; calculating a current focus value corresponding to a current adjustment position of a focus adjustment assembly; prompting focus according to the focus parameter peak value and the current focus value, and prompting the user to operate the focus adjustment assembly, causing the focus parameter peak value and the current focus value to be the same. By means of calculating a focus parameter peak value when a focus object in a current image is in focus and calculating a current focus value corresponding to a current adjustment position of a focus adjustment assembly, and prompting focus according to the focus parameter peak value and the current focus value and prompting the user to operate the focus adjustment assembly, the focus parameter peak value and the current focus value are caused to be the same; thus the photography device can quickly and accurately focus on a target object, enabling the user to quickly and accurately find the focus position of the focus object when it is in focus.

Description

手动对焦的提示方法、控制装置、拍摄设备及控制器Manual focus prompting method, control device, photographing device and controller

技术领域Technical field

本发明实施例涉及相机领域，尤其涉及一种手动对焦的提示方法、控制装置、拍摄设备及控制器。Embodiments of the present invention relate to the field of cameras, and in particular, to a method, a control device, a photographing device, and a controller for prompting manual focus.

背景技术Background technique

手动对焦是指通过转动镜头对焦环或通过按机身方向键步进以实现对焦清晰的对焦方式，在数码相机中，手动对焦依然是不可或缺的功能。Manual focus is achieved by turning the lens focus ring or by pressing the body direction keys to achieve a clear focus. In digital cameras, manual focus is still an indispensable feature.

当用户对相机进行手动对焦时，用户需要慢慢的转动相机的对焦环，并在转动对焦环的过程中，通过人眼观测屏幕上的对焦对象是否清晰，当用户观测到屏幕上的对焦对象足够清晰时停止转动对焦环，在手动对焦的过程中，用户需要不断的转动对焦环才能找到较佳的对焦位置，无法快速准确的找到对焦对象合焦时的对焦位置。When the user manually focuses on the camera, the user needs to slowly rotate the focus ring of the camera, and during the process of rotating the focus ring, the human eye observes whether the focus object on the screen is clear, and when the user observes the focus object on the screen. When it is clear enough, stop turning the focus ring. During the manual focus process, the user needs to rotate the focus ring continuously to find a better focus position, and can not quickly and accurately find the focus position when the focus object is in focus.

发明内容Summary of the invention

本发明实施例提供一种手动对焦的提示方法、控制装置、拍摄设备及控制器，以使用户快速准确的找到对焦对象合焦时的对焦位置。Embodiments of the present invention provide a manual focus prompting method, a control device, a photographing device, and a controller, so that a user can quickly and accurately find a focus position when a focus object is in focus.

本发明实施例的第一方面是提供一种手动对焦的提示方法，包括：A first aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a method for prompting manual focus, including:

计算当前图像中对焦对象在合焦时的对焦参数峰点值；Calculating a focus parameter peak value of the focus object in the current image when the focus is in focus;

计算对焦调节组件当前的调整位置对应的当前对焦值；Calculating a current focus value corresponding to a current adjustment position of the focus adjustment component;

根据所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值进行对焦提示，提示用户操作所述对焦调节组件，以使所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值一致。And performing a focus prompt according to the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value, prompting the user to operate the focus adjustment component to make the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value coincide.

本发明实施例的第二方面是提供一种控制装置，包括：存储器和处理器；A second aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a control apparatus, including: a memory and a processor;

所述存储器用于存储程序代码；The memory is for storing program code;

所述处理器，调用所述程序代码，当程序代码被执行时，用于执行以下操作： The processor calls the program code to perform the following operations when the program code is executed:

本发明实施例的第三方面是提供一种拍摄设备，包括：A third aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a photographing apparatus, including:

机身；body;

光学组件，安装在所述机身，用于采集图像信息；An optical component mounted on the body for collecting image information;

对焦调节组件，与所述光学组件连接，用于调节所述光学组件的焦距；以及第二方面所述的控制装置。a focus adjustment assembly coupled to the optical assembly for adjusting a focal length of the optical assembly; and the control device of the second aspect.

本发明实施例的第四方面是提供一种拍摄***，包括：A fourth aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a photographing system, including:

机身；body;

天线，安装在所述机身，用于与拍摄设备进行通讯；An antenna mounted on the body for communicating with a photographing device;

对焦调节组件，安装在所述机身，用于调节所述拍摄设备的光学组件的焦距；以及第二方面所述的控制装置。a focus adjustment assembly mounted to the body for adjusting a focal length of an optical component of the photographing device; and the control device of the second aspect.

本实施例提供的手动对焦的提示方法、控制装置、拍摄设备及控制器，通过计算当前图像中对焦对象在合焦时的对焦参数峰点值，以及对焦调节组件当前的调整位置对应的当前对焦值，根据对焦参数峰点值和当前对焦值进行对焦提示，提示用户操作对焦调节组件，以使对焦参数峰点值和当前对焦值一致，从而使拍摄设备可以快速准确的聚焦在目标物体上，使得用户在手动对焦时，快速准确的找到对焦对象合焦时的对焦位置。The manual focus prompting method, the control device, the photographing device and the controller provided by the embodiment, calculate the focus parameter peak value of the focus object in the current image when the focus is in focus, and the current focus corresponding to the current adjustment position of the focus adjustment component. The value is based on the focus parameter peak value and the current focus value to prompt the user to operate the focus adjustment component, so that the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value are consistent, so that the shooting device can quickly and accurately focus on the target object, This allows the user to quickly and accurately find the focus position when the focus subject is in focus when manually focusing.

附图说明DRAWINGS

为了更清楚地说明本发明实施例中的技术方案，下面将对实施例描述中所需要使用的附图作一简单地介绍，显而易见地，下面描述中的附图是本发明的一些实施例，对于本领域普通技术人员来讲，在不付出创造性劳动性的前提下，还可以根据这些附图获得其他的附图。In order to more clearly illustrate the technical solutions in the embodiments of the present invention, the drawings used in the description of the embodiments will be briefly described below. It is obvious that the drawings in the following description are some embodiments of the present invention. Other drawings may also be obtained from those of ordinary skill in the art in view of the drawings.

图1为本发明实施例提供的拍摄设备的结构示意图；FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a photographing apparatus according to an embodiment of the present invention;

图2为本发明实施例提供的拍摄设备和远程控制器的结构示意图； 2 is a schematic structural diagram of a photographing device and a remote controller according to an embodiment of the present invention;

图3为本发明实施例提供的手动对焦的提示方法的流程图；FIG. 3 is a flowchart of a method for prompting manual focus according to an embodiment of the present invention;

图4为本发明实施例提供的显示组件的示意图；4 is a schematic diagram of a display assembly according to an embodiment of the present invention;

图5为本发明另一实施例提供的手动对焦的提示方法的流程图；FIG. 5 is a flowchart of a method for prompting manual focus according to another embodiment of the present invention; FIG.

图6为本发明实施例提供的对焦提示的示意图；FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of a focus prompt according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG.

图7为本发明实施例提供的对焦提示的示意图；FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of a focus prompt according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG.

图8为本发明实施例提供的对焦提示的示意图；FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of a focus prompt according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG.

图9为本发明实施例提供的对焦提示的示意图；FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of a focus prompt according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG.

图10为本发明实施例提供的对焦提示的示意图；FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of a focus prompt according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG.

图11为本发明实施例提供的对焦提示的示意图；FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of a focus prompt according to an embodiment of the present invention;

图12为本发明实施例提供的对焦提示的示意图；FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of a focus prompt according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG.

图13为本发明实施例提供的对焦提示的示意图；FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of a focus prompt according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG.

图14为本发明实施例提供的对焦提示的示意图；FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of a focus prompt according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG.

图15为本发明实施例提供的对焦提示的示意图；FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of a focus prompt according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG.

图16为本发明实施例提供的对焦提示的示意图；FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram of a focus prompt according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG.

图17为本发明实施例提供的对焦提示的示意图；FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram of a focus prompt according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG.

图18为本发明实施例提供的对焦提示的示意图；FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram of a focus prompt according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG.

图19为本发明实施例提供的对焦提示的示意图；FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram of a focus prompt according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG.

图20为本发明实施例提供的对焦提示的示意图；FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram of a focus prompt according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG.

图21为本发明实施例提供的对焦提示的示意图；FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram of a focus prompt according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG.

图22为本发明实施例提供的对焦提示的示意图；FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram of a focus prompt according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG.

图23为本发明实施例提供的对焦提示的示意图；FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram of a focus prompt according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG.

图24为本发明实施例提供的对焦提示的示意图；FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram of a focus prompt according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG.

图25为本发明实施例提供的对焦提示的示意图；FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram of a focus prompt according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG.

图26为本发明另一实施例提供的手动对焦的提示方法的流程图；FIG. 26 is a flowchart of a method for prompting manual focus according to another embodiment of the present invention; FIG.

图27为本发明实施例提供的对焦提示的示意图；FIG. 27 is a schematic diagram of a focus prompt according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG.

图28为本发明另一实施例提供的手动对焦的提示方法的流程图；28 is a flowchart of a method for prompting manual focus according to another embodiment of the present invention;

图29为本发明另一实施例提供的手动对焦的提示方法的流程图；FIG. 29 is a flowchart of a method for prompting manual focus according to another embodiment of the present invention; FIG.

图30为本发明实施例提供的控制装置的结构图。FIG. 30 is a structural diagram of a control apparatus according to an embodiment of the present invention.

附图标记：Reference mark:

100-拍摄设备 102-光学组件 104-机身 100-Photographing Equipment 102-Optical Components 104-Face

106-对焦调节组件 108-控制装置 1082-存储器106-focus adjustment component 108-control device 1082-memory

1084-处理器 105-显示组件 101-通讯接口1084-Processor 105-Display Component 101-Communication Interface

110-远程控制器 113-显示组件 114-对焦调节组件110-Remote Controller 113-Display Unit 114-Focus Adjustment Unit

112-天线 111-通讯接口 116-控制装置112-antenna 111-communication interface 116-control device

1162-存储器 1164-处理器 400-显示组件1162-Memory 1164-Processor 400-Display Component

402-视场 404-聚焦区域 406-对焦对象402-field of view 404-focus area 406-focus object

408-聚焦区域 410-聚焦区域 600-显示组件408-focus area 410-focus area 600-display component

601-第一指示标志 602-第二指示标志 603-预设区域601 - first indication mark 602 - second indication mark 603 - preset area

800-对焦提示图标 802-刻度图像 804-第一指示标志800-focus alert icon 802-scale image 804-first indicator

806-第二指示标志 1100-对焦提示图标 1102-刻度图像806-second indicator 1100-focusing icon 1102-scale image

1104-第一指示标志 1106第二指示标志 1400-对焦提示图标1104-first indication mark 1106 second indication mark 1400- focus indication icon

1402-第一边框 1404-第二边框 1700-对焦提示图标1402-first border 1404-second border 1700-focus prompt icon

1702-第一环 1704-第二环 2000-对焦提示图标1702-first ring 1704-second ring 2000-focus alert icon

2002-线段 2004-半圆 2006-直径2002-Line 2004-Semi-2006-Diameter

2008-目标指示环 2300-对焦提示图标 2302-第一线段2008-target indicator ring 2300-focusing icon 2302-first line segment

2304-第二线段 2306-目标指示环 300-控制装置2304-second line segment 2306-target indicating ring 300-control device

301-存储器 302-处理器 1-位置301-memory 302-processor 1-position

2-位置 3-位置 4-位置2-position 3-position 4-position

具体实施方式Detailed ways

下面将结合本发明实施例中的附图，对本发明实施例中的技术方案进行清楚地描述，显然，所描述的实施例仅仅是本发明一部分实施例，而不是全部的实施例。基于本发明中的实施例，本领域普通技术人员在没有做出创造性劳动前提下所获得的所有其他实施例，都属于本发明保护的范围。The technical solutions in the embodiments of the present invention will be clearly described with reference to the accompanying drawings in the embodiments of the present invention. It is obvious that the described embodiments are only a part of the embodiments of the present invention, and not all of the embodiments. All other embodiments obtained by those skilled in the art based on the embodiments of the present invention without creative efforts are within the scope of the present invention.

需要说明的是，当组件被称为“固定于”另一个组件，它可以直接在另一个组件上或者也可以存在居中的组件。当一个组件被认为是“连接”另一个组件，它可以是直接连接到另一个组件或者可能同时存在居中组件。It should be noted that when a component is referred to as being "fixed" to another component, it can be directly on the other component or the component can be present. When a component is considered to "connect" another component, it can be directly connected to another component or possibly a central component.

除非另有定义，本文所使用的所有的技术和科学术语与属于本发明的技术领域的技术人员通常理解的含义相同。本文中在本发明的说明书中所使用的术语只是为了描述具体的实施例的目的，不是旨在于限制本发明。本文所使用的术语“及/或”包括一个或多个相关的所列项目的任意的和所有的组合。All technical and scientific terms used herein have the same meaning as commonly understood by one of ordinary skill in the art to which this invention belongs, unless otherwise defined. The specification of the present invention herein The terminology used herein is for the purpose of describing particular embodiments and is not intended to limit the invention. The term "and/or" used herein includes any and all combinations of one or more of the associated listed items.

下面结合附图，对本发明的一些实施方式作详细说明。在不冲突的情况下，下述的实施例及实施例中的特征可以相互组合。Some embodiments of the present invention are described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings. The features of the embodiments and examples described below can be combined with each other without conflict.

图1为本发明实施例提供的拍摄设备的结构示意图。如图1所示，拍摄设备100可以是相机、摄像机、或其他具有拍摄功能的设备例如智能终端等。所述的拍摄功能是指具有拍摄静态图像和/或动态图像的功能。具体的，拍摄设备100可以是手动控制的拍摄设备，也可以是自动拍摄设备，自动拍摄设备可具有手动对焦模式和自动对焦模式。在自动对焦模式下，拍摄设备可以自动调节其光学组件例如镜头，例如，自动对焦马达可控制镜头转动，以调节镜头的焦距。手动对焦模式是自动对焦模式的重要补充，例如，当环境照明太暗时，自动对焦马达无法精确的控制镜头转动，此时需要进行手动对焦。但是，现有技术中，当用户对相机进行手动对焦时，用户需要慢慢的转动相机的对焦环，并在转动对焦环的过程中，通过人眼观测屏幕上的对焦对象是否清晰，当用户观测到屏幕上的对焦对象足够清晰时停止转动对焦环，在手动对焦的过程中，用户需要不断的转动对焦环才能找到较佳的对焦位置，无法快速准确的找到对焦对象合焦时的对焦位置。针对该问题，本实施例提供了一种手动对焦的提示方法，例如，提示用户当前图像是否处于合焦状态，如果当前图像没有合焦，则提示用户如何调整拍摄设备的对焦调节组件，以使当前图像合焦。FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a photographing apparatus according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 1, the photographing apparatus 100 may be a camera, a video camera, or other device having a photographing function such as a smart terminal or the like. The photographing function refers to a function of taking a still image and/or a moving image. Specifically, the photographing apparatus 100 may be a manually controlled photographing device or an automatic photographing device, and the automatic photographing device may have a manual focus mode and an auto focus mode. In autofocus mode, the camera automatically adjusts its optical components such as the lens. For example, an autofocus motor controls lens rotation to adjust the focal length of the lens. The manual focus mode is an important addition to the autofocus mode. For example, when the ambient illumination is too dark, the autofocus motor cannot precisely control the lens rotation, and manual focus is required. However, in the prior art, when the user manually focuses on the camera, the user needs to slowly rotate the focus ring of the camera, and during the process of rotating the focus ring, the human eye observes whether the focus object on the screen is clear, when the user When the focus object on the screen is observed to be clear enough, the focus ring is stopped. During the manual focus process, the user needs to continuously rotate the focus ring to find a better focus position, and cannot quickly and accurately find the focus position when the focus object is in focus. . In response to the problem, the present embodiment provides a method for prompting manual focus, for example, prompting the user whether the current image is in a focus state, and if the current image is not in focus, prompting the user to adjust the focus adjustment component of the photographing device, so that The current image is in focus.

拍摄设备100可以是手持的拍摄设备，也可以是搭载在可移动平台例如无人机上的拍摄设备。如果拍摄设备100搭载在可移动平台例如无人机上，则通过远程控制器对拍摄设备100进行控制。如图2所示，拍摄设备100搭载在无人机上，远程控制器110可对拍摄设备100进行控制。远程控制器110可以是无人机对应的专用控制器，也可以是其他安装有控制程序的终端设备，例如智能手机、平板电脑等。远程控制器110和拍摄设备100可以进行有线通信或无线通信。如图2所示，拍摄设备100包括通讯接口101，远程控制器110包括通讯接口111，通讯接口101和通讯接口 111可以相互通信，例如，远程控制器110可以通过通讯接口111向拍摄设备100发送控制指令，拍摄设备100可以通过通讯接口101将其拍摄到的图像数据发送给远程控制器110。在一些实施例中，远程控制器110可以和拍摄设备100进行无线通信，可选的，通讯接口101和通讯接口111为无线通讯接口。如图2所示，远程控制器110还包括天线112，天线112和通讯接口111耦合，天线112用于接收和/或发送无线信号。相应的，拍摄设备100也可以包括一个用于接收和/或发送无线信号的天线。The photographing apparatus 100 may be a handheld photographing apparatus or a photographing apparatus mounted on a movable platform such as a drone. If the photographing apparatus 100 is mounted on a movable platform such as a drone, the photographing apparatus 100 is controlled by a remote controller. As shown in FIG. 2, the photographing apparatus 100 is mounted on a drone, and the remote controller 110 can control the photographing apparatus 100. The remote controller 110 may be a dedicated controller corresponding to the drone, or may be another terminal device installed with a control program, such as a smart phone, a tablet, or the like. The remote controller 110 and the photographing apparatus 100 can perform wired communication or wireless communication. As shown in FIG. 2, the photographing apparatus 100 includes a communication interface 101, and the remote controller 110 includes a communication interface 111, a communication interface 101, and a communication interface. The 111 can communicate with each other. For example, the remote controller 110 can transmit a control command to the photographing device 100 through the communication interface 111, and the photographing device 100 can transmit the image data captured by the photographing device 101 to the remote controller 110 through the communication interface 101. In some embodiments, the remote controller 110 can communicate wirelessly with the photographing device 100. Optionally, the communication interface 101 and the communication interface 111 are wireless communication interfaces. As shown in FIG. 2, remote controller 110 also includes an antenna 112 coupled to communication interface 111 for receiving and/or transmitting wireless signals. Accordingly, the photographing apparatus 100 may also include an antenna for receiving and/or transmitting wireless signals.

如图1和图2所示，拍摄设备100包括光学组件102和机身104，光学组件102可以包括镜头，镜头可以独立安装在机身104上，也可以集成在机身104上。拍摄设备100可通过光学组件102获取图像数据。另外，拍摄设备100还包括显示组件105，显示组件105可用于显示后续实施例中所述的一个或多个指示信息。显示组件105可以包括取景器或屏幕，该屏幕可以是触摸屏。As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the photographing apparatus 100 includes an optical component 102 and a body 104, and the optical component 102 may include a lens that may be independently mounted on the body 104 or integrated on the body 104. The photographing apparatus 100 can acquire image data through the optical component 102. In addition, the photographing apparatus 100 further includes a display component 105 that can be used to display one or more pieces of indication information described in the subsequent embodiments. Display component 105 can include a viewfinder or screen, which can be a touch screen.

在一些实施例中，如图1所示，拍摄设备100还包括对焦调节组件106，对焦调节组件106与光学组件102耦合，对焦调节组件106可用于调节光学组件102的焦点。在一些实施例中，对焦调节组件106可以包括机械调节装置例如环绕光学组件102的对焦环。当用户转动对焦环时，光学组件102的焦点将随着对焦环的转动而改变。在另外一些实施例中，对焦调节组件106还可以包括一个或多个调节按钮或调整轮，调节按钮或调整轮可设置在光学组件102或机身104上，当用于按压调节按钮或转动调整轮时，拍摄设备100将产生电信号，该电信号用于指示如何调整光学组件102的焦点，例如如何调整光学组件102中的一个或多个光学元件的转动方向和/或转动距离。该电信号可以指示安装在光学组件102或机身104上的电机转动以驱动光学组件102聚焦。调节按钮或调整轮可以是机械的调节按钮或调整轮，也可以是显示组件105上显示的虚拟的调节按钮或调整轮。In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 1 , the photographing apparatus 100 further includes a focus adjustment component 106 that is coupled to the optical component 102 , and the focus adjustment component 106 can be used to adjust the focus of the optical component 102 . In some embodiments, focus adjustment assembly 106 can include a mechanical adjustment device such as a focus ring that surrounds optical assembly 102. When the user turns the focus ring, the focus of the optical assembly 102 will change as the focus ring rotates. In still other embodiments, the focus adjustment assembly 106 can also include one or more adjustment buttons or adjustment wheels that can be disposed on the optical assembly 102 or the body 104 when used to press an adjustment button or to rotate an adjustment At the time of the wheel, the photographing device 100 will generate an electrical signal that is used to indicate how to adjust the focus of the optical assembly 102, such as how to adjust the direction of rotation and/or the rotational distance of one or more of the optical components in the optical assembly 102. The electrical signal can indicate that the motor mounted on optical assembly 102 or body 104 rotates to drive optical assembly 102 to focus. The adjustment button or adjustment wheel can be a mechanical adjustment button or adjustment wheel, or it can be a virtual adjustment button or adjustment wheel displayed on display assembly 105.

如图2所示，远程控制器110还包括显示组件113，显示组件113可以显示拍摄设备100拍摄到的图像数据，也可以显示后续实施例中所述的一个或多个指示信息。显示组件113可以包括取景器或屏幕，该屏幕可以是触摸屏。另外，如图2所示，远程控制器110还包括对焦调节组件 114，对焦调节组件114可用于调节光学组件102的焦点。对焦调节组件114可以触发远程控制器110给拍摄设备100发送调节信号，该调节信号可以指示安装在光学组件102或机身104上的电机转动以驱动光学组件102聚焦。同理于对焦调节组件106，对焦调节组件114还可以包括一个或多个机械的调节按钮或调整轮，或一个或多个显示在显示组件113上的虚拟的调节按钮或调整轮。As shown in FIG. 2, the remote controller 110 further includes a display component 113 that can display image data captured by the photographing apparatus 100, and can also display one or more pieces of indication information described in the subsequent embodiments. Display component 113 can include a viewfinder or screen, which can be a touch screen. In addition, as shown in FIG. 2, the remote controller 110 further includes a focus adjustment component. 114, focus adjustment component 114 can be used to adjust the focus of optical component 102. The focus adjustment component 114 can trigger the remote controller 110 to send an adjustment signal to the photographing device 100, which can indicate that the motor mounted on the optical assembly 102 or the fuselage 104 rotates to drive the optical assembly 102 to focus. Similarly to the focus adjustment assembly 106, the focus adjustment assembly 114 can also include one or more mechanical adjustment buttons or adjustment wheels, or one or more virtual adjustment buttons or adjustment wheels that are displayed on the display assembly 113.

在一些实施例中，如图1所示，拍摄设备100还可以包括控制装置108，控制装置108可以设置在机身104上，或者控制装置108可以是机身104的一部分。在一些实施例中，控制装置108可以独立于机身104，也可以和机身104耦合。控制装置108可以执行后续实施例所述的手动对焦的提示方法。如图1所示，控制装置108包括存储器1082和处理器1084，存储器1082用于存储程序代码，处理器1084可以调用程序代码，当程序代码被执行时，处理器1084用于执行后续实施例所述的手动对焦的提示方法。In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 1, the photographing apparatus 100 may further include a control device 108, which may be disposed on the body 104, or the control device 108 may be part of the fuselage 104. In some embodiments, control device 108 can be coupled to body 104 or to body 104. The control device 108 can perform the manual focus prompting method described in the subsequent embodiments. As shown in FIG. 1, the control device 108 includes a memory 1082 for storing program code, a processor 1084 for calling program code, and a processor 1084 for executing the subsequent embodiment when the program code is executed. The method of prompting manual focus.

如图2所示，远程控制器110还可以包括控制装置116，控制装置116包括存储器1162和处理器1164，存储器1162用于存储程序代码，处理器1164可以调用程序代码，当程序代码被执行时，处理器1164用于执行后续实施例所述的手动对焦的提示方法。As shown in FIG. 2, the remote controller 110 may further include a control device 116 including a memory 1162 for storing program code, and a processor 1164 for calling program code when the program code is executed. The processor 1164 is configured to perform the prompting method of the manual focus described in the subsequent embodiments.

可选的，存储器1082和/或存储器1162包括非随机的计算机可读存储介质，例如随机存取存储器(RAM)、只读存储器、闪速存储器、硬盘存储器或光介质等。处理器1084和/或处理器1164包括任何合适的硬件处理器，如微处理器、微控制器、一个中央处理单元(CPU)，图形处理单元(GPU)，网络处理器(NP)、数字信号处理器(DSP)、专用集成电路(ASIC)、现场可编程门阵列(FPGA)，或其它可编程逻辑器件，分立门或晶体管逻辑器件，分立的硬件组件等。Alternatively, memory 1082 and/or memory 1162 includes non-random computer readable storage media such as random access memory (RAM), read only memory, flash memory, hard disk memory, or optical media. Processor 1084 and/or processor 1164 includes any suitable hardware processor such as a microprocessor, microcontroller, a central processing unit (CPU), graphics processing unit (GPU), network processor (NP), digital signals Processor (DSP), application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), field programmable gate array (FPGA), or other programmable logic device, discrete gate or transistor logic device, discrete hardware components, and the like.

下面结合具体的实施例对手动对焦的提示方法进行详细的介绍。The method of prompting manual focus will be described in detail below in conjunction with a specific embodiment.

本发明实施例提供一种手动对焦的提示方法。图3为本发明实施例提供的手动对焦的提示方法的流程图。如图3所示，本实施例中的方法，可以包括： Embodiments of the present invention provide a method for prompting manual focus. FIG. 3 is a flowchart of a method for prompting manual focus according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 3, the method in this embodiment may include:

步骤S301、计算当前图像中对焦对象在合焦时的对焦参数峰点值。Step S301: Calculate a focus parameter peak point value of the focus object in the current image when the focus is in focus.

本实施例方法的执行主体可以是拍摄设备100的控制装置108，或者是远程控制器110的控制装置116。通过控制装置108执行该方法，拍摄设备100可提示用户当前图像是否处于合焦状态，如果当前图像没有合焦，则提示用户如何调整拍摄设备100的对焦调节组件106，以使当前图像合焦。或者，通过控制装置116执行该方法，远程控制器110可提示用户拍摄设备100拍摄的当前图像是否处于合焦状态，如果当前图像没有合焦，则提示用户如何调整远程控制器110上的对焦调节组件114，以使当前图像合焦。The execution subject of the method of the present embodiment may be the control device 108 of the photographing apparatus 100 or the control device 116 of the remote controller 110. By performing the method by the control device 108, the photographing apparatus 100 can prompt the user whether the current image is in a focus state, and if the current image is not in focus, prompt the user how to adjust the focus adjustment component 106 of the photographing apparatus 100 to focus the current image. Alternatively, the method may be performed by the control device 116, and the remote controller 110 may prompt the user whether the current image captured by the photographing device 100 is in a focus state. If the current image is not in focus, the user is prompted to adjust the focus adjustment on the remote controller 110. Component 114 to focus the current image.

具体的，拍摄设备100通过光学组件102获取图像数据，控制装置108计算当前图像中对焦对象在合焦时的对焦参数峰点值；或者，拍摄设备100通过光学组件102获取图像数据之后，将图像数据发送给远程控制器110，远程控制器110的控制装置116计算当前图像中对焦对象在合焦时的对焦参数峰点值。Specifically, the photographing apparatus 100 acquires image data through the optical component 102, and the control device 108 calculates a focus parameter peak point value of the in-focus object in the current image when the focus is in focus; or, after the photographing apparatus 100 acquires the image data through the optical component 102, the image is taken The data is sent to the remote controller 110, and the control device 116 of the remote controller 110 calculates the focus parameter peak point value of the focused object in the current image at the time of focusing.

具体的，所述计算当前图像中对焦对象在合焦时的对焦参数峰点值，包括：对所述当前图像进行图像分析，得到对焦评价函数；根据对焦评价函数计算当前图像中对焦对象在合焦时的对焦参数峰点值。Specifically, the calculating a focus parameter peak point value of the focus object in the current image when the focus is in focus includes: performing image analysis on the current image to obtain a focus evaluation function; and calculating a focus object in the current image according to the focus evaluation function The focus parameter peak value of the focus time.

例如，控制装置108或控制装置116对当前图像进行分析，得到对焦评价函数，进一步根据对焦评价函数计算当前图像中对焦对象在合焦时的对焦参数峰点值。For example, the control device 108 or the control device 116 analyzes the current image to obtain a focus evaluation function, and further calculates a focus parameter peak point value of the focus object in the current image when the focus is in focus according to the focus evaluation function.

理想的对焦评价函数应该具有单峰性例如仅有一个极值、无偏性例如只在最佳对焦时具有最大值、能反应离焦的极性例如位于焦前或焦后、同时应该具备较好的抗干扰能力。在本实施例中，控制装置108或控制装置116可基于频域分析、信息论、或差分运算等确定对焦评价函数，具体的，对所述当前图像进行图像分析，得到对焦评价函数包括如下几种可行的实现方式：The ideal focus evaluation function should have a unimodality, such as only one extreme value, no bias, such as having a maximum value only at the best focus, and a polarity capable of reacting defocus, such as before or after the focus, and should have Good anti-interference ability. In this embodiment, the control device 108 or the control device 116 may determine the in-focus evaluation function based on the frequency domain analysis, the information theory, or the difference operation, etc., specifically, performing image analysis on the current image, and obtaining the in-focus evaluation function includes the following Possible implementation:

一种可行的实现方式是：在频域对所述当前图像进行图像分析，得到对焦评价函数。A feasible implementation manner is: performing image analysis on the current image in the frequency domain to obtain a focus evaluation function.

图像的频域分析中，图像的清晰和聚焦的程度由图像高频分量的多少来决定，高频分量多则图像清晰；高频分量少则图像模糊。因此可以利用图像高频分量的多少作为图像清晰度的判定依据。由于高清晰度图像的主要特征是具有清晰的边缘和丰富的图像细节，而边缘和细节对应于图像频域上的高频分量；离焦图像的模糊在频域上体现为高频成份的衰减。In the frequency domain analysis of images, the degree of sharpness and focus of the image is determined by the number of high-frequency components of the image. The high-frequency components are more clear, and the high-frequency components are less blurred. So can benefit The number of high-frequency components of the image is used as the basis for determining the sharpness of the image. Since the main features of high-definition images are clear edges and rich image details, edges and details correspond to high-frequency components in the image frequency domain; blurring of out-of-focus images is reflected in the frequency domain as attenuation of high-frequency components. .

对图像进行频域分析时最常用的方法是傅里叶变换，具体的，通过傅里叶变换将空间位置分布的灰度图像变成相应的空间频率分布的表示，然后将空间频率分布中高频成分的大小作为当前图像是否清晰的判断依据，能够评价当前图像清晰度的函数即可作为对焦评价函数。The most common method for frequency domain analysis of images is the Fourier transform. Specifically, the gray image of the spatial position distribution is transformed into a corresponding spatial frequency distribution by Fourier transform, and then the spatial frequency distribution is high frequency. The size of the component is used as a basis for judging whether or not the current image is clear, and a function capable of evaluating the sharpness of the current image can be used as a focus evaluation function.

在其他实施例中，所述在频域对所述当前图像进行图像分析，包括：基于离散小波变换对所述当前图像进行图像分析。In other embodiments, the performing image analysis on the current image in the frequency domain comprises performing image analysis on the current image based on a discrete wavelet transform.

由于傅里叶变换提供了有关频率域的信息，但有关时间的局部化信息却基本丢失，为了解决该问题，除了傅里叶变换之外，还可以采用离散小波变换对当前图像进行频域分析。Since the Fourier transform provides information about the frequency domain, the localized information about time is basically lost. In order to solve this problem, in addition to the Fourier transform, the current image can be analyzed by frequency domain analysis using discrete wavelet transform. .

离散小波变换(Discrete Wavelet Transform，简称DWT)通过缩放母小波的宽度来获得信号的频率特征，通过平移母小波来获得信号的时间信息。原始输入信号通过两个互补的滤波器组，其中一个滤波器为低通滤波器，原始输入信号通过该低通滤波器后可得到信号的近似值A，另一个为高通滤波器，原始输入信号通过该高通滤波器后可得到信号的细节值D。在小波分析中，近似值A是大的缩放因子计算的系数，表示信号的低频分量，而细节值D是小的缩放因子计算的系数，表示信号的高频分量。Discrete Wavelet Transform (DWT) obtains the frequency characteristics of the signal by scaling the width of the mother wavelet, and obtains the time information of the signal by translating the mother wavelet. The original input signal passes through two complementary filter banks, one of which is a low-pass filter. The original input signal passes through the low-pass filter to obtain an approximate value A of the signal, and the other is a high-pass filter. The original input signal passes. The detail value D of the signal is obtained after the high pass filter. In wavelet analysis, the approximation A is a large scale factor calculated coefficient representing the low frequency component of the signal, and the detail value D is a small scale factor calculated coefficient representing the high frequency component of the signal.

对静态二维数字图像，可先对其进行若干次二维DWT变换，将图像信息分解为高频成分H、V和D和低频成分A。C_h、C_v、C_d分别表示水平高频系数矩阵、垂直高频系数矩阵、对角高频系数矩阵。对二维数字图像的低频系数削弱其幅值，对二维数字图像的高频系数则增强其幅值，再将高频部分取绝对值求和，可得到如下公式(1)：For a static two-dimensional digital image, it can be subjected to several two-dimensional DWT transformations to decompose the image information into high frequency components H, V and D and low frequency component A. C _h , C _v , and C _d represent a horizontal high-frequency coefficient matrix, a vertical high-frequency coefficient matrix, and a diagonal high-frequency coefficient matrix, respectively. The low frequency coefficient of the two-dimensional digital image weakens its amplitude, the high frequency coefficient of the two-dimensional digital image is enhanced by its amplitude, and the high frequency part is summed to obtain the absolute value, and the following formula (1) can be obtained:

其中，E值越大，说明二维数字图像的高频分量越丰富，即边缘变化过度越明显，因此，二维数字图像的清晰度也就越高。可选的，公式(1)可作为对焦评价函数。 Among them, the larger the E value, the richer the high-frequency component of the two-dimensional digital image, that is, the more the edge change is more obvious, so the clarity of the two-dimensional digital image is higher. Alternatively, the formula (1) can be used as a focus evaluation function.

在一些实施例中，所述在频域对所述当前图像进行图像分析，包括：基于离散余弦变换对所述当前图像进行图像分析。In some embodiments, the performing image analysis on the current image in the frequency domain comprises performing image analysis on the current image based on a discrete cosine transform.

由于傅里叶变换对复数进行处理，其计算程度较为复杂，计算所需的时间长，为了解决该问题，除了傅里叶变换之外，还可以采用离散余弦变换对当前图像进行频域分析。离散余弦变换能聚集更多的能量，对高频分量有较好的分离能力，在清晰度评价函数中，分离并保留高频分量作为图像清晰度的评价尺度。Since the Fourier transform processes the complex number, the degree of calculation is complicated, and the calculation takes a long time. In order to solve the problem, in addition to the Fourier transform, the frequency domain analysis of the current image can be performed by using the discrete cosine transform. Discrete cosine transform can gather more energy and have better separation ability for high-frequency components. In the definition evaluation function, high-frequency components are separated and retained as the evaluation scale of image sharpness.

例如，f(x,y)表示大小为M*N的数字图像矩阵，f(x,y)的离散余弦变换表示为F(u,v)，F(u,v)表示为如下公式(2)：For example, f(x, y) represents a matrix of digital images of size M*N, the discrete cosine transform of f(x, y) is expressed as F(u, v), and F(u, v) is expressed as the following formula (2) ):

其中，

among them,

根据f(x,y)的离散余弦变换F(u,v)，对焦评价函数可表示为如下公式(3)：According to the discrete cosine transform F(u,v) of f(x,y), the in-focus evaluation function can be expressed as the following formula (3):

其中，(u+v)＞min(M,N)，

可以看成是图像的高频分量，|F(1,1)|可以看成是图像的直流分量。Where (u+v)>min(M,N),

It can be regarded as the high frequency component of the image, and |F(1,1)| can be regarded as the DC component of the image.

由于聚焦图像和离焦图像在亮度和灰度级方面相差较大，另外，图像的清晰度还与图像自身的亮度和灰度级有关，故引入相对高频分量对图像的清晰度进行判别。图像的相对高频分量是图像的高频分量和直流分量的比，直流分量在一定程度上反映了图像的整体亮度和总体信息。当E1的值最大时，图像最清晰。Since the focused image and the out-of-focus image differ greatly in brightness and gray level, and the sharpness of the image is also related to the brightness and gray level of the image itself, relatively high-frequency components are introduced to discriminate the sharpness of the image. The relatively high frequency component of the image is the ratio of the high frequency component and the direct current component of the image. The DC component reflects the overall brightness and overall information of the image to some extent. When the value of E1 is the largest, the image is the clearest.

另一种可行的实现方式是：对所述当前图像进行图像分析，得到所述当前图像的信息熵，将所述信息熵作为对焦评价函数。 Another possible implementation manner is: performing image analysis on the current image to obtain information entropy of the current image, and using the information entropy as a focus evaluation function.

聚焦图像和离焦图像相比，聚焦图像的灰度值的多样性较大，而离焦图像的灰度值趋于单一灰度，从而导致聚焦图像的信息熵和离焦图像的信息熵是不同的。因此，可以将当前图像的信息熵作为对焦评价函数。根据香农信息论可知，熵越大，信息量越大，对于二维图像而言，熵越大，图像越清晰。Compared with the out-of-focus image, the focused image has a larger diversity of gray values, while the out-of-focus image has a gray value that tends to a single gray level, resulting in the information entropy of the focused image and the information entropy of the out-of-focus image. different. Therefore, the information entropy of the current image can be used as a focus evaluation function. According to Shannon's information theory, the larger the entropy, the larger the amount of information. For two-dimensional images, the larger the entropy, the clearer the image.

例如，对于要拍摄的场景，拍摄设备可以拍摄K个图像，其中，K是正整数，计算K个图像中每个图像的灰度直方图。其中，第k个图像在K个图像中取灰度值g的概率记为P_k(g)，则第k个图像的灰度熵函数可表示为如下公式(4)：For example, for a scene to be photographed, the photographing apparatus can take K images, where K is a positive integer, and calculate a gray histogram of each of the K images. Wherein, the probability that the kth image takes the gray value g in the K images is denoted as P _k (g), and the gray entropy function of the kth image can be expressed as the following formula (4):

其中，G表示最大灰度值,1≤k≤K。Where G represents the maximum gray value, 1 ≤ k ≤ K.

根据公式(4)可知，K个图像中每个图像对应一个灰度熵，根据K个图像中每个图像的灰度熵，可确定出K个图像中灰度熵最大的目标图像，即通过如下公式(5)可确定出K个图像中灰度熵最大的目标图像δ：According to formula (4), each of the K images corresponds to a gray entropy. According to the gray entropy of each image in the K images, the target image with the highest gray entropy in the K images can be determined. The target image δ with the highest gray entropy among the K images can be determined by the following formula (5):

S_δ＝max{S_k} (5)S _δ =max{S _k } (5)

目标图像δ的灰度熵最大，说明K个图像中目标图像δ是聚焦图像。The gray level entropy of the target image δ is the largest, indicating that the target image δ in the K images is a focused image.

图像的灰度熵表示了图像像素点灰度分布的离散程度，当计算区域内图像像素点的灰度值变化较大时，灰度熵较大；当计算区域内所有图像像素点的灰度值相等时，灰度熵最小。即当图像完全模糊时，像素点的灰度值分布离散度较小，灰度熵较小；而当图像较锐利时，像素点的灰度值分布离散度较大，灰度熵较大，因此，灰度熵在一定程度上可以表征图像的清晰程度。可选的，灰度熵函数可作为对焦评价函数。The gray entropy of the image indicates the degree of dispersion of the gray level distribution of the image pixel. When the gray value of the image pixel in the calculation area changes greatly, the gray entropy is larger; when calculating the gray level of all image pixels in the area When the values are equal, the gray entropy is the smallest. That is, when the image is completely blurred, the dispersion of the gray value of the pixel is small, and the gray entropy is small; when the image is sharp, the dispersion of the gray value of the pixel is large, and the gray entropy is large. Therefore, the gray level entropy can represent the clarity of the image to a certain extent. Alternatively, the gray level entropy function can be used as a focus evaluation function.

再一种可行的实现方式是：对所述当前图像进行微分运算，得到所述当前图像的灰度差分值，将所述当前图像的灰度差分值作为对焦评价函数。A further feasible implementation manner is: performing a differential operation on the current image to obtain a grayscale difference value of the current image, and using a grayscale difference value of the current image as a focus evaluation function.

差分运算可以确定图像中灰度值分布的梯度。通常，图像边缘或轮廓的梯度大于图像其他位置的梯度。此外，尖锐边缘的梯度通常大于模糊边缘的梯度，并且聚焦图像通常具有比离焦图像更尖锐的边缘。因此，图像的梯度可以用作图像的对焦评价函数。在一些实施例中，对于数字图像，差分运算可以包括用于计算图像中的梯度的有限差分运算，并且可以得到梯度的绝对值之和，将梯度的绝对值之和作为图像的对焦评价函数。在差分运算中常用的梯度算子主要有Roberts算子，Sobel算子等。The difference operation determines the gradient of the gray value distribution in the image. Typically, the gradient of the edge or outline of the image is larger than the gradient of the other locations of the image. Furthermore, the gradient of sharp edges is typically larger than the gradient of blurred edges, and the focused image typically has sharper edges than the out-of-focus image. Therefore, the gradient of the image can be used as a focus evaluation function of the image. In some embodiments, for The digital image, the difference operation may include a finite difference operation for calculating a gradient in the image, and the sum of the absolute values of the gradients may be obtained, and the sum of the absolute values of the gradients is taken as an in-focus evaluation function of the image. The gradient operators commonly used in differential operations mainly include Roberts operators, Sobel operators, and so on.

在一些实施例中，控制装置108或控制装置116可以对拍摄设备100的视场(field of view，简称FOV)中的一个区域进行如上所述的图像分析，以得到对焦对象的对焦评价函数，该区域也被称为拍摄设备100的聚焦区域。在一些实施例中，拍摄设备100可以包括多个以预设模式例如阵列排列的聚焦区域。In some embodiments, the control device 108 or the control device 116 may perform image analysis as described above on one of the field of view (FOV) of the photographing apparatus 100 to obtain an in-focus evaluation function of the in-focus object. This area is also referred to as a focus area of the photographing apparatus 100. In some embodiments, the photographing apparatus 100 may include a plurality of focus areas arranged in a preset pattern, such as an array.

如图4所示，400示意性的表示显示组件，从显示组件400中可以看到拍摄设备100的一个示意性的视场402。显示组件400可以是拍摄设备100的显示组件105，例如，拍摄设备100的取景器或屏幕。或者，显示组件400可以是远程控制器110的显示组件113，例如，远程控制器110的屏幕。如图4所示，多个聚焦区域404在视场402中以阵列的形式排列。As shown in FIG. 4, 400 schematically represents a display assembly from which a schematic field of view 402 of the photographing device 100 can be seen. The display component 400 can be the display component 105 of the photographing apparatus 100, for example, a viewfinder or screen of the photographing apparatus 100. Alternatively, display component 400 can be display component 113 of remote controller 110, such as the screen of remote controller 110. As shown in FIG. 4, a plurality of focus areas 404 are arranged in an array in the field of view 402.

控制装置108或控制装置116可以对一个或多个聚焦区域404进行如上所述的图像分析，例如对视场402中的对焦对象406进行如上所述的图像分析。在一些实施例中，用户可以选择与对焦对象406重叠的一个或多个聚焦区域404，控制装置108或控制装置116对用户选择的一个或多个聚焦区域404进行如上所述的图像分析，例如，用户可以通过拍摄设备100或远程控制器110上的按钮或转轮选择与对焦对象406重叠的一个或多个聚焦区域404。或者，用户还可以通过在拍摄设备100或远程控制器110的触摸屏上以触控的方式选择与对焦对象406重叠的一个或多个聚焦区域404。另外，用户选择的一个或多个聚焦区域404可以以高亮的形式突显，以指示用户选择的一个或多个聚焦区域404与对焦对象406对应。因此，用户选择的与对焦对象406重叠的一个或多个聚焦区域404也可称为目标指示框，例如图4所示的聚焦区域408和聚焦区域410。 Control device 108 or control device 116 may perform image analysis as described above on one or more focus regions 404, such as image analysis of focus object 406 in field of view 402 as described above. In some embodiments, the user may select one or more focus areas 404 that overlap the focus object 406, and the control device 108 or control device 116 performs image analysis as described above on one or more focus areas 404 selected by the user, such as The user may select one or more focus areas 404 that overlap the focus object 406 by a button or wheel on the photographing device 100 or the remote controller 110. Alternatively, the user may also select one or more focus areas 404 that overlap with the focus object 406 by touch on the touch screen of the photographing device 100 or the remote controller 110. Additionally, one or more focus areas 404 selected by the user may be highlighted in a highlighted form to indicate that one or more focus areas 404 selected by the user correspond to the focus object 406. Accordingly, one or more focus areas 404 selected by the user that overlap with the focus object 406 may also be referred to as target indication frames, such as focus area 408 and focus area 410 shown in FIG.

如图4所示，聚焦区域404在视场402中具有固定位置和固定大小。在其他实施例中，聚焦区域404在视场402中的位置可以不固定，聚焦区域404的大小也可以不固定。例如，用户可以在拍摄设备100或远程控制器110的触摸屏上以触控的方式选择一个目标区域，以使聚焦区域404位于该目标区域中。可选的，用户选择的目标区域大于一个聚焦区域404，以使该目标区域可显示一个或多个聚焦区域404。另外，用户在触摸屏上以触控的方式选择一个目标区域后，该触摸屏上还可以显示该目标区域的边框，以指示用户的选择，该边框还可以作为目标指示框。目标指示框可具有多种形状，例如，圆形或多边形。当目标指示框为圆形时，目标指示框又可称为目标指示环。如图4所示，目标指示框是方形的，在其他实施例中，目标指示框还可以是三角形的或矩形的。通常情况，聚焦区域404的中心称为对焦点。在一些实施例中，聚焦区域404可以很小，以至于将聚焦区域404本身作为对焦点。As shown in FIG. 4, focus area 404 has a fixed position and a fixed size in field of view 402. In other embodiments, the position of the focus area 404 in the field of view 402 may not be fixed, and the size of the focus area 404 may not be fixed. For example, the user can be in the shooting device 100 or remotely controlled A target area is selected by touch on the touch screen of the device 110 such that the focus area 404 is located in the target area. Optionally, the user selected target area is larger than one focus area 404 such that the target area can display one or more focus areas 404. In addition, after the user selects a target area by touch on the touch screen, the border of the target area may also be displayed on the touch screen to indicate the user's selection, and the border may also serve as the target indication box. The target indicator frame can have a variety of shapes, such as a circle or a polygon. When the target indication frame is circular, the target indication frame may also be referred to as a target indication ring. As shown in FIG. 4, the target indicator frame is square. In other embodiments, the target indicator frame may also be triangular or rectangular. Typically, the center of the focus area 404 is referred to as the focus point. In some embodiments, the focus area 404 can be so small that the focus area 404 itself is used as the focus point.

如图4所示，对焦对象406可以是视场402中预设位置上的拍摄对象。在一些实施例中，视场402中可以包括多个拍摄对象，用户可以从多个拍摄对象中选择一个拍摄对象作为对焦对象。相应的，所述方法还包括：接收对当前图像中对焦对象的选择指令。例如，用户可以在拍摄设备100或远程控制器110的触摸屏上以触控的方式选择一个拍摄对象作为对焦对象。拍摄设备100或远程控制器110根据用户对对焦对象的选择操作生成对焦对象的选择指令。当远程控制器110生成对焦对象的选择指令后，还可以将该对焦对象的选择指令发送给拍摄设备100。As shown in FIG. 4, the focus object 406 can be a subject at a preset position in the field of view 402. In some embodiments, a plurality of photographic subjects may be included in the field of view 402, and the user may select one of the plurality of photographic subjects as the in-focus object. Correspondingly, the method further comprises: receiving a selection instruction for the focused object in the current image. For example, the user can select a subject as a focus object by touch on the touch screen of the photographing apparatus 100 or the remote controller 110. The photographing apparatus 100 or the remote controller 110 generates a selection instruction of the in-focus object in accordance with the user's selection operation on the in-focus object. After the remote controller 110 generates a selection instruction of the focus object, the selection instruction of the focus object may also be transmitted to the photographing apparatus 100.

可选的，所述接收对当前图像中对焦对象的选择指令，包括：接收对当前图像中对焦对象上的对焦点的选择指令。具体的，用户可以通过选择对焦对象上的对焦点来选择对焦对象。Optionally, the receiving a selection instruction for the focus object in the current image includes: receiving a selection instruction for a focus point on the focus object in the current image. Specifically, the user can select the focus object by selecting the focus point on the focus object.

或者，所述当前图像显示在触摸屏上；所述接收对当前图像中对焦对象的选择指令，包括：检测对所述触摸屏上显示的对焦对象的触摸操作。例如，用户可以在拍摄设备100或远程控制器110的触摸屏上以触控的方式选择一个拍摄对象作为对焦对象。拍摄设备100或远程控制器110根据用户对对焦对象的触摸操作生成对焦对象的选择指令。Alternatively, the current image is displayed on the touch screen; the receiving a selection instruction for the focus object in the current image comprises: detecting a touch operation on the focus object displayed on the touch screen. For example, the user can select a subject as a focus object by touch on the touch screen of the photographing apparatus 100 or the remote controller 110. The photographing apparatus 100 or the remote controller 110 generates a selection instruction of the in-focus object in accordance with a user's touch operation on the in-focus object.

可见，控制装置108或控制装置116可以对当前图像进行如上所述的图像分析，以得到对焦对象的对焦评价函数，也可以对当前图像中的一个区域例如一个或多个聚焦区域进行如上所述的图像分析，以得到对焦对象的对焦评价函数。在得到对焦评价函数之后，可根据根据对焦评价函数计算当前图像中对焦对象在合焦时的对焦参数峰点值。对焦参数峰点值是指示对焦对象何时合焦的一个参考。在一些实施例中，对焦参数峰点值可以是对焦评价函数的最大值。在其他一些实施例中，对焦参数峰点值可以与对焦评价函数的变量相关联，或者与对焦评价函数的变量相对应的参数相关联。对焦参数峰点值可以对应于对焦评价函数达到最大值时变量的值。例如，对焦参数峰点值可以指示从目标物体到拍摄设备的距离，该距离也称为目标对焦距离。It can be seen that the control device 108 or the control device 116 can perform image analysis as described above on the current image to obtain an in-focus evaluation function of the in-focus object, and can also perform an area such as one or more focus areas in the current image as described above. Image analysis to get the focus evaluation function of the focused object. After obtaining the in-focus evaluation function, it can be evaluated according to the focus The function calculates the peak value of the focus parameter of the focused object in the current image when it is in focus. The focus parameter peak point value is a reference that indicates when the focus object is in focus. In some embodiments, the focus parameter peak point value can be the maximum value of the in-focus evaluation function. In some other embodiments, the focus parameter peak point value may be associated with a variable of the in-focus evaluation function or a parameter corresponding to a variable of the in-focus evaluation function. The focus parameter peak point value may correspond to the value of the variable when the focus evaluation function reaches the maximum value. For example, the focus parameter peak point value may indicate the distance from the target object to the photographing device, which is also referred to as the target focus distance.

步骤S302、计算对焦调节组件当前的调整位置对应的当前对焦值。Step S302: Calculate a current focus value corresponding to a current adjustment position of the focus adjustment component.

可选的，所述对焦调节组件包括如下至少一种：对焦环、调节按钮、调整轮。Optionally, the focus adjustment component comprises at least one of the following: a focus ring, an adjustment button, and an adjustment wheel.

当对焦调节组件106或对焦调节组件114调整光学组件102的焦点时，当前对焦值会发生改变。例如，在对焦调节组件106包括机械调节装置例如环绕光学组件102的对焦环的实施例中，当对焦环转动时，当前对焦值会发生改变，同时，当前对焦值可以反映出对焦环的转动位置。再例如，在对焦调节组件106或对焦调节组件114包括调整轮的实施例中，当调整轮转动时，当前对焦值会发生改变，同时，当前对焦值可以反映出该调整轮的转动位置。When the focus adjustment component 106 or the focus adjustment component 114 adjusts the focus of the optical component 102, the current focus value changes. For example, in embodiments where the focus adjustment assembly 106 includes a mechanical adjustment device such as a focus ring that surrounds the optical assembly 102, the current focus value changes as the focus ring rotates, while the current focus value can reflect the rotational position of the focus ring. . For another example, in an embodiment where the focus adjustment component 106 or the focus adjustment component 114 includes an adjustment wheel, the current focus value may change when the adjustment wheel rotates, and the current focus value may reflect the rotational position of the adjustment wheel.

在一些实施例中，根据对焦调节组件106或对焦调节组件114的反馈可直接获得当前对焦值。在另外一些实施例中，还可以通过对焦评价函数计算出当前对焦值。在一些实施例中，当前对焦值可以是根据当前对焦调整参数捕获的图像使用对焦评价函数计算的值。在另外一些实施例中，当前对焦值可以与对焦评价函数的变量相关联，或者与对焦评价函数的变量相对应的参数相关联。例如，当前对焦值可以指示拍摄设备的当前对焦距离。也就是说，假设物体放置在拍摄设备的前面，并且假设物体和拍摄设备之间的距离等于当前对焦距离当前对焦距离，则拍摄设备捕捉到的该物体的图像是清晰的。通过调整光学组件102以使当前对焦距离等于目标对焦距离时，可使得拍摄设备100聚焦在目标物体上。In some embodiments, the current focus value can be directly obtained from the feedback of focus adjustment component 106 or focus adjustment component 114. In still other embodiments, the current focus value can also be calculated by the focus evaluation function. In some embodiments, the current focus value may be a value calculated using an in-focus evaluation function based on an image captured by the current focus adjustment parameter. In still other embodiments, the current focus value may be associated with a variable of the in-focus evaluation function or a parameter corresponding to a variable of the in-focus evaluation function. For example, the current focus value may indicate the current focus distance of the photographing device. That is, assuming that the object is placed in front of the photographing device, and assuming that the distance between the object and the photographing device is equal to the current focus distance of the current focus distance, the image of the object captured by the photographing device is clear. By adjusting the optical component 102 such that the current focus distance is equal to the target focus distance, the photographing apparatus 100 can be focused on the target object.

步骤S303、根据所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值进行对焦提示，提示用户操作所述对焦调节组件，以使所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值一致。 Step S303: Perform a focus prompt according to the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value, and prompt the user to operate the focus adjustment component to make the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value coincide.

计算出对焦参数峰点值和当前对焦值之后，可基于对焦参数峰点值和当前对焦值进行对焦提示，该对焦提示可以提示用户拍摄设备100的光学组件102是否完全聚焦于目标对象，例如，是否当前对焦值等于对焦参数峰点值，或/及离焦的程度有多大，例如，当前对焦值和对焦参数峰点值之间的差值是多少。After calculating the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value, a focus prompt may be performed based on the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value, and the focus prompt may prompt the user whether the optical component 102 of the photographing apparatus 100 is completely focused on the target object, for example, Whether the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, or/and the degree of defocus, for example, what is the difference between the current focus value and the focus parameter peak point value.

在本实施例中，对焦提示的方式有多种，例如以视觉形式、听觉形式、机械形式等进行对焦提示，下面实施例将对每一种对焦提示方式进行介绍。In this embodiment, there are various ways of focusing the prompt, for example, focusing in a visual form, an audible form, a mechanical form, etc., and the following embodiments will introduce each of the focus prompting modes.

以视觉形式的对焦提示为例，对焦提示可直观的显示在显示组件105或显示组件113上，例如，拍摄设备100的取景器或屏幕、或者远程控制器110的屏幕。当对焦提示显示在屏幕上时，拍摄设备100拍摄的图像可以和对焦提示同时显示在屏幕上，对焦提示可以覆盖或叠加在屏幕显示的图像上。当用户操作对焦调节组件106或对焦调节组件114以改变拍摄设备100的焦点时，用户可以同时看到图像和对焦提示以确定图像是否合焦。Taking the focus form of the visual form as an example, the focus prompt can be visually displayed on the display component 105 or the display component 113, for example, the viewfinder or screen of the photographing apparatus 100, or the screen of the remote controller 110. When the focus prompt is displayed on the screen, the image captured by the photographing apparatus 100 can be displayed on the screen simultaneously with the focus prompt, and the focus prompt can be overlaid or superimposed on the image displayed on the screen. When the user operates the focus adjustment component 106 or the focus adjustment component 114 to change the focus of the photographing apparatus 100, the user can simultaneously see the image and the focus prompt to determine whether the image is in focus.

本实施例通过计算当前图像中对焦对象在合焦时的对焦参数峰点值，以及对焦调节组件当前的调整位置对应的当前对焦值，根据对焦参数峰点值和当前对焦值进行对焦提示，提示用户操作对焦调节组件，以使对焦参数峰点值和当前对焦值一致，从而使拍摄设备可以快速准确的聚焦在目标物体上，使得用户在手动对焦时，快速准确的找到对焦对象合焦时的对焦位置。In this embodiment, by calculating a focus parameter peak value of the focus object in the current image in focus, and a current focus value corresponding to the current adjustment position of the focus adjustment component, the focus prompt is performed according to the focus parameter peak value and the current focus value, and the prompt is prompted. The user operates the focus adjustment component to make the focus parameter peak point value coincide with the current focus value, so that the shooting device can quickly and accurately focus on the target object, so that the user can quickly and accurately find the focus of the focus object when focusing manually. Focus position.

本发明实施例提供一种手动对焦的提示方法。图5为本发明另一实施例提供的手动对焦的提示方法的流程图。如图5所示，在图3所示实施例的基础上，步骤S303根据所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值进行对焦提示，可以包括：Embodiments of the present invention provide a method for prompting manual focus. FIG. 5 is a flowchart of a method for prompting manual focus according to another embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 5, based on the embodiment shown in FIG. 3, step S303 performs a focus prompt according to the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value, which may include:

步骤S501、在显示组件上显示第一指示标志，所述第一指示标志用于指示所述对焦参数峰点值。Step S501: Display a first indication flag on the display component, where the first indication flag is used to indicate the focus parameter peak point value.

步骤S502、在所述显示组件上显示第二指示标志，所述第二指示标志用于指示所述当前对焦值。 Step S502: Display a second indication flag on the display component, where the second indication flag is used to indicate the current focus value.

其中，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离与所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值之间的差值相关。The indication distance between the first indication mark and the second indication mark is related to a difference between the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value.

在本实施例中，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离可以是显示组件上所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的距离。该指示距离与所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值之间的差值相关，例如，该指示距离可以和所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值之间的差值成比例。In this embodiment, the indication distance between the first indication mark and the second indication mark may be a distance between the first indication mark and the second indication mark on the display component. The indication distance is related to a difference between the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value, for example, the indication distance may be a difference between the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value proportion.

当前对焦值可以由对焦调节组件106或对焦调节组件114进行调节。在一些实施例中，当前对焦值可与对焦调节组件106或对焦调节组件114的调整位置相关联。调整位置可以是对焦调节组件106或对焦调节组件114的调整范围内的一个位置。例如，当对焦调节组件106包括对焦环或调整轮时，调整位置可以是对焦环的转动位置或调整轮的转动位置。The current focus value can be adjusted by the focus adjustment component 106 or the focus adjustment component 114. In some embodiments, the current focus value can be associated with an adjustment position of focus adjustment component 106 or focus adjustment component 114. The adjusted position may be a position within the adjustment range of focus adjustment assembly 106 or focus adjustment assembly 114. For example, when the focus adjustment assembly 106 includes a focus ring or an adjustment wheel, the adjustment position may be a rotational position of the focus ring or a rotational position of the adjustment wheel.

可选的，用于指示所述对焦参数峰点值的第一指示标志和用于指示所述当前对焦值的第二指示标志可以显示在显示组件的任何合适的位置，例如，显示在显示组件的中部、上部、下部、左边、右边、左上角、左下角、右上角、右下角等。Optionally, a first indication flag for indicating the focus parameter peak point value and a second indication flag for indicating the current focus value may be displayed at any suitable position of the display component, for example, displayed on the display component Middle, upper, lower, left, right, upper left, lower left, upper right, lower right, etc.

在本实施例中，步骤S501在显示组件上显示第一指示标志包括：在显示组件的预设区域显示第一指示标志；相应的，步骤S502在所述显示组件上显示第二指示标志，包括：如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二指示标志显示在所述预设区域的第一侧；如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二指示标志显示在所述预设区域的第二侧，所述第二侧与所述第一侧相对；如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二指示标志显示在所述预设区域，所述第二指示标志和所述第一指示标志重叠。In this embodiment, the step of displaying the first indicator on the display component in step S501 includes: displaying a first indicator in a preset area of the display component; and correspondingly, step S502 displays a second indicator on the display component, including And if the current focus value is smaller than the focus parameter peak point value, displaying the second indication flag on a first side of the preset area; if the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value And displaying the second indicator on a second side of the preset area, the second side being opposite to the first side; if the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, Displaying the second indication mark in the preset area, where the second indication mark and the first indication mark overlap.

具体的，用于指示所述对焦参数峰点值的第一指示标志显示在显示组件的预设区域，该预设区域可以是预先设定的显示组件的中部、上部、下部、左边、右边、左上角、左下角、右上角、右下角等区域中的一个区域，也可以是用户在显示组件上选择的一个区域。根据对焦参数峰点值和当前对焦值之间的大小关系，确定用于指示当前对焦值的第二指示标志相对于第一指示标志的位置。具体的，如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二指示标志显示在第一指示标志的一侧；如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二指示标志显示在第一指示标志的另一侧；如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则所述第二指示标志和所述第一指示标志重叠。Specifically, the first indicator for indicating the peak value of the focus parameter is displayed in a preset area of the display component, and the preset area may be a middle part, an upper part, a lower part, a left side, a right side of the preset display component, One of the areas of the upper left corner, the lower left corner, the upper right corner, and the lower right corner may also be an area selected by the user on the display component. And determining, according to a magnitude relationship between the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value, a position of the second indication mark for indicating the current focus value with respect to the first indication mark. Specifically, if the current focus value is small And displaying, by the focus parameter peak point value, the second indication mark on one side of the first indication mark; if the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, then the second indication mark Displayed on the other side of the first indicator; if the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, the second indicator flag and the first indicator flag overlap.

如图6所示，第一指示标志601用于指示对焦参数峰点值，第二指示标志602用于指示当前对焦值。第一指示标志601显示在显示组件600的预设区域603。如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将第二指示标志602显示在第一指示标志601的左侧；如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将第二指示标志602显示在第一指示标志601的右侧，如图7所示。比较图6和图7可知，当所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值时，第二指示标志602在第一指示标志601的左侧，当所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值时，第二指示标志602在第一指示标志601的右侧，第二指示标志602的左侧和右侧相对。如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则第二指示标志602和第一指示标志601重叠。此处只是示意性说明，对第一指示标志601显示的位置不做具体限定，对第二指示标志602相对于第一指示标志601的位置也不做具体限定，同时也不限定第一指示标志601和第二指示标志602的形状。As shown in FIG. 6, the first indicator flag 601 is used to indicate a focus parameter peak point value, and the second indicator flag 602 is used to indicate a current focus value. The first indicator mark 601 is displayed in the preset area 603 of the display component 600. If the current focus value is less than the focus parameter peak point value, displaying the second indicator flag 602 on the left side of the first indicator flag 601; if the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, The second indication mark 602 is displayed on the right side of the first indication mark 601 as shown in FIG. 6 and FIG. 7 , when the current focus value is smaller than the focus parameter peak point value, the second indicator flag 602 is on the left side of the first indicator flag 601, when the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter At the peak point value, the second indicator mark 602 is on the right side of the first indicator mark 601, and the left side and the right side of the second indicator mark 602 are opposite. If the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, the second indicator flag 602 and the first indicator flag 601 overlap. The position of the first indicator 601 is not specifically limited. The position of the second indicator 602 relative to the first indicator 601 is not specifically limited, and the first indicator is not limited. 601 and the shape of the second indicator mark 602.

可选的，所述预设区域包括所述对焦对象。如图6和图7所示，第一指示标志601所在的预设区域603还可以包括对焦对象。可选的，预设区域大于第一指示标志601。对焦对象具体可以是如图4所示的对焦对象406。Optionally, the preset area includes the focus object. As shown in FIG. 6 and FIG. 7, the preset area 603 where the first indicator mark 601 is located may further include a focus object. Optionally, the preset area is larger than the first indicator mark 601. The focus object may specifically be the focus object 406 as shown in FIG.

可选的，所述预设区域包括目标指示框，所述目标指示框用于指示选择对焦的对象。例如，第一指示标志601所在的预设区域603还可以包括目标指示框，该目标指示框用于指示选择对焦的对象。该目标指示框可以是如图4所示的聚焦区域408和聚焦区域410。Optionally, the preset area includes a target indication frame, and the target indication frame is used to indicate an object that selects focus. For example, the preset area 603 where the first indicator mark 601 is located may further include a target indication frame for indicating an object to select focus. The target indication frame may be a focus area 408 and a focus area 410 as shown in FIG.

可选的，在对焦完成的预设时间之后，所述第一指示标志和/或所述第二指示标志消失。Optionally, after the preset time of focusing completion, the first indicator mark and/or the second indicator mark disappear.

在其他实施例中，步骤S501在显示组件上显示第一指示标志包括：在显示组件上显示的刻度图像上显示所述第一指示标志；相应的，步骤S502在所述显示组件上显示第二指示标志，包括：在显示组件上显示的刻度图像上显示所述第二指示标志；其中，所述第一指示标志位于所述刻度图像上的固定位置，所述第二指示标志随着所述对焦调节组件的调整位置的变化，在所述刻度图像上移动。In other embodiments, displaying the first indicator on the display component in step S501 includes: displaying the first indicator on the scale image displayed on the display component; and correspondingly, step S502 displays the second on the display component. Indicia, including: displayed on the display component Displaying the second indication mark on the scale image; wherein the first indication mark is located at a fixed position on the scale image, and the second indication mark is in accordance with a change position of the adjustment position of the focus adjustment component Move on the scale image.

如图8所示，显示组件显示有对焦提示图标800，对焦提示图标800包括刻度图像802，可选的，刻度图像802包括刻度曲线。刻度曲线呈半圆弧。第一指示标志804用于指示对焦参数峰点值，第二指示标志806用于指示当前对焦值。可选的，第一指示标志804位于刻度图像802的固定位置，第二指示标志806可以随着对焦调节组件106或对焦调节组件114的调整位置的变化在刻度图像802上移动。第一指示标志804和第二指示标志806之间的距离表示指示距离，该指示距离与所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值之间的差值相关。As shown in FIG. 8, the display component displays a focus alert icon 800, and the focus alert icon 800 includes a scale image 802. Optionally, the scale image 802 includes a scale curve. The scale curve is a semi-circular arc. The first indicator flag 804 is used to indicate a focus parameter peak point value, and the second indicator flag 806 is used to indicate a current focus value. Optionally, the first indicator 804 is located at a fixed position of the scale image 802, and the second indicator 806 is movable on the scale image 802 as the adjustment position of the focus adjustment component 106 or the focus adjustment component 114 changes. The distance between the first indicator mark 804 and the second indicator mark 806 represents an indication distance that is related to a difference between the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value.

所述在显示组件上显示的刻度图像上显示所述第一指示标志，包括：在显示组件上显示的刻度图像的中间位置显示第一指示标志；相应的，所述在显示组件上显示的刻度图像上显示所述第二指示标志，包括：如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二指示标志显示在所述刻度图像上所述中间位置的第一侧；如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二指示标志显示在所述刻度图像上所述中间位置的第二侧，所述第二侧与所述第一侧相对；如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二指示标志显示在所述中间位置。Displaying the first indication mark on the scale image displayed on the display component, comprising: displaying a first indication mark at an intermediate position of the scale image displayed on the display component; correspondingly, the scale displayed on the display component Displaying the second indicator on the image, comprising: displaying the second indicator on a first side of the intermediate position on the scale image if the current focus value is less than the focus parameter peak point value If the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, displaying the second indicator mark on a second side of the intermediate position on the scale image, the second side and the first side Side opposite; if the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, the second indicator is displayed at the intermediate position.

如图8所示，第一指示标志804显示在刻度图像802的中间位置。如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将第二指示标志806显示在第一指示标志804的左侧。As shown in FIG. 8, the first indicator 804 is displayed at an intermediate position of the scale image 802. If the current focus value is less than the focus parameter peak point value, the second indicator flag 806 is displayed on the left side of the first indicator flag 804.

如图9所示，第一指示标志804显示在刻度图像802的中间位置。如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将第二指示标志806显示在第一指示标志804的右侧。As shown in FIG. 9, the first indicator 804 is displayed at an intermediate position of the scale image 802. If the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, the second indicator flag 806 is displayed on the right side of the first indicator flag 804.

如图10所示，第一指示标志804显示在刻度图像802的中间位置。如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将第二指示标志806显示在刻度图像802的中间位置，即第二指示标志806和第一指示标志804重叠。 As shown in FIG. 10, the first indicator 804 is displayed at an intermediate position of the scale image 802. If the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, the second indicator flag 806 is displayed at an intermediate position of the scale image 802, that is, the second indicator flag 806 and the first indicator flag 804 overlap.

在一些实施例中，当所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值时，也可以将第二指示标志806显示在第一指示标志804的右侧；当所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值时，将第二指示标志806显示在第一指示标志804的左侧。In some embodiments, when the current focus value is less than the focus parameter peak point value, the second indicator flag 806 may also be displayed on the right side of the first indicator flag 804; when the current focus value is greater than the When the parameter peak point value is focused, the second indicator flag 806 is displayed on the left side of the first indicator flag 804.

在其他实施例中，所述刻度图像包括刻度直线。In other embodiments, the scale image comprises a scale line.

如图11所示，显示组件显示有对焦提示图标1100，对焦提示图标1100包括刻度图像1102，刻度图像1102包括刻度直线。第一指示标志1104用于指示对焦参数峰点值，第二指示标志1106用于指示当前对焦值。可选的，第一指示标志1104位于刻度图像1102的固定位置，第二指示标志1106可以随着对焦调节组件106或对焦调节组件114的调整位置的变化在刻度图像1102上移动。第一指示标志1104和第二指示标志1106之间的距离表示指示距离，该指示距离与所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值之间的差值相关。As shown in FIG. 11, the display component displays a focus alert icon 1100, the focus alert icon 1100 includes a scale image 1102, and the scale image 1102 includes a scale line. The first indicator 1104 is used to indicate the focus parameter peak point value, and the second indicator 1106 is used to indicate the current focus value. Optionally, the first indicator 1104 is located at a fixed position of the scale image 1102, and the second indicator 1106 can move on the scale image 1102 as the adjustment position of the focus adjustment component 106 or the focus adjustment component 114 changes. The distance between the first indicator flag 1104 and the second indicator flag 1106 represents an indication distance that is related to a difference between the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value.

如图11所示，第一指示标志1104显示在刻度图像1102的中间位置。如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将第二指示标志1106显示在第一指示标志1104的左侧。As shown in FIG. 11, the first indication mark 1104 is displayed at an intermediate position of the scale image 1102. If the current focus value is less than the focus parameter peak point value, the second indicator flag 1106 is displayed on the left side of the first indicator flag 1104.

如图12所示，第一指示标志1104显示在刻度图像1102的中间位置。如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将第二指示标志1106显示在第一指示标志1104的右侧。As shown in FIG. 12, the first indication mark 1104 is displayed at an intermediate position of the scale image 1102. If the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, the second indicator flag 1106 is displayed on the right side of the first indicator flag 1104.

如图13所示，第一指示标志1104显示在刻度图像1102的中间位置。如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将第二指示标志1106显示在刻度图像1102的中间位置，即第二指示标志1106和第一指示标志1104重叠。As shown in FIG. 13, the first indication mark 1104 is displayed at an intermediate position of the scale image 1102. If the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, the second indicator flag 1106 is displayed at an intermediate position of the scale image 1102, that is, the second indicator flag 1106 and the first indicator flag 1104 overlap.

在一些实施例中，当所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值时，也可以将第二指示标志1106显示在第一指示标志1104的右侧；当所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值时，将第二指示标志1106显示在第一指示标志1104的左侧。In some embodiments, when the current focus value is less than the focus parameter peak point value, the second indicator flag 1106 may also be displayed on the right side of the first indicator flag 1104; when the current focus value is greater than the When the parameter peak point value is focused, the second indicator flag 1106 is displayed on the left side of the first indicator flag 1104.

可选的，所述刻度图像的中间位置位于所述显示组件的预设区域，所述预设区域包括目标指示框，所述目标指示框用于指示选择对焦的对象。 Optionally, an intermediate position of the scale image is located in a preset area of the display component, and the preset area includes a target indication frame, and the target indication frame is used to indicate an object that selects focus.

例如，刻度图像802或刻度图像1102的中间位置位于显示组件的预设区域，该预设区域包括目标指示框，该目标指示框用于指示选择对焦的对象。For example, the intermediate position of the scale image 802 or the scale image 1102 is located in a preset area of the display component, the preset area including a target indication frame for indicating an object to be in focus.

在另外一些实施例中，步骤S501在显示组件上显示第一指示标志，所述第一指示标志用于指示所述对焦参数峰点值，包括：在显示组件上显示第一边框，所述第一边框用于指示所述对焦参数峰点值；相应的，步骤S502在所述显示组件上显示第二指示标志，所述第二指示标志用于指示所述当前对焦值，包括：在所述显示组件上显示第二边框，所述第二边框用于指示所述当前对焦值；其中，所述第二边框的中心和所述第一边框的中心重叠。In some other embodiments, step S501 displays a first indicator on the display component, the first indicator is used to indicate the focus parameter peak point value, including: displaying a first border on the display component, the first a border is used to indicate the focus parameter peak point value; correspondingly, step S502 displays a second indicator on the display component, the second indicator is used to indicate the current focus value, including: A second frame is displayed on the display component, and the second frame is used to indicate the current focus value; wherein a center of the second frame overlaps a center of the first frame.

可选的，所述第一边框的大小不变，所述第二边框的大小随着所述对焦调节组件的调整位置的变化而变化。Optionally, the size of the first frame is unchanged, and the size of the second frame changes according to a change in the adjustment position of the focus adjustment component.

如图14所示，显示组件显示有对焦提示图标1400，对焦提示图标1400包括第一边框1402和第二边框1404，第一边框1402用于指示对焦参数峰点值，第二边框1404用于指示当前对焦值，即第一指示标志具体可以是第一边框1402，第二指示标志具体可以是第二边框1404。可选的，第一边框1402的中心和第二边框1404的中心重叠。第一边框1402的大小不变，第二边框1404的大小随着所述对焦调节组件的调整位置的变化而变化。第一边框1402的底边和第二边框1404的底边之间的距离d表示指示距离，该指示距离与所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值之间的差值相关。As shown in FIG. 14, the display component displays a focus prompt icon 1400. The focus prompt icon 1400 includes a first frame 1402 and a second frame 1404. The first frame 1402 is used to indicate a focus parameter peak point value, and the second frame 1404 is used to indicate The current focus value, that is, the first indication flag may be a first frame 1402, and the second indication flag may be a second frame 1404. Optionally, the center of the first frame 1402 and the center of the second frame 1404 overlap. The size of the first bezel 1402 does not change, and the size of the second bezel 1404 changes as the adjustment position of the focus adjustment component changes. The distance d between the bottom edge of the first bezel 1402 and the bottom edge of the second bezel 1404 represents an indication distance that is related to a difference between the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value.

所述在所述显示组件上显示第二边框，包括：如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二边框显示在所述第一边框的里面；如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二边框显示在所述第一边框的外面；如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二边框显示覆盖在所述第一边框上。The displaying the second frame on the display component includes: if the current focus value is smaller than the focus parameter peak point value, displaying the second frame on the inside of the first frame; If the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, the second frame is displayed outside the first frame; if the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, then the second A border display is overlaid on the first border.

如图14所示，如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将第二边框1404显示在第一边框1402的里面。As shown in FIG. 14, if the current focus value is smaller than the focus parameter peak point value, the second frame 1404 is displayed inside the first frame 1402.

如图15所示，如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将第二边框1404显示在第一边框1402的外面。 As shown in FIG. 15, if the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, the second frame 1404 is displayed outside the first frame 1402.

如图16所示，如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将第二边框1404显示覆盖在第一边框1402上，即第二边框1404和第一边框1402重叠。As shown in FIG. 16 , if the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, the second border 1404 is overlaid on the first frame 1402 , that is, the second frame 1404 and the first frame 1402 overlap.

或者，所述在所述显示组件上显示第二边框，包括：如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二边框显示在所述第一边框的里面；如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二边框显示在所述第一边框的外面；如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二边框显示覆盖在所述第一边框上。Or displaying the second frame on the display component, including: if the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, displaying the second frame inside the first frame; If the current focus value is smaller than the focus parameter peak point value, the second frame is displayed outside the first frame; if the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, the The second border display is overlaid on the first border.

例如，当所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值时，将第二边框1404显示在第一边框1402的外面。当所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值时，将第二边框1404显示在第一边框1402的里面。当所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值时，将第二边框1404显示覆盖在第一边框1402上。For example, when the current focus value is less than the focus parameter peak point value, the second frame 1404 is displayed outside the first frame 1402. When the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, the second frame 1404 is displayed inside the first frame 1402. When the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, the second frame 1404 is displayed overlaid on the first frame 1402.

可选的，所述第一边框为目标指示框，所述目标指示框用于指示选择对焦的对象。在对焦完成的预设时间之后，所述第二边框消失。Optionally, the first frame is a target indication frame, and the target indication frame is used to indicate an object that selects focus. After the preset time of focusing completion, the second frame disappears.

例如，第一边框1402为目标指示框，目标指示框用于指示选择对焦的对象。在对焦完成的预设时间之后，第二边框1404消失。For example, the first border 1402 is a target indication frame, and the target indication frame is used to indicate an object that selects focus. After the preset time of focusing completion, the second bezel 1404 disappears.

在另外一些实施例中，所述在显示组件上显示第一边框，所述第一边框用于指示所述对焦参数峰点值，包括：在显示组件上显示第一环，所述第一环用于指示所述对焦参数峰点值；相应的，所述在所述显示组件上显示第二边框，所述第二边框用于指示所述当前对焦值，包括：在显示组件上显示第二环，所述第二环用于指示所述当前对焦值；其中，所述第二环和所述第一环是同心圆。In some other embodiments, the displaying a first frame on the display component, the first frame is used to indicate the focus parameter peak point value, including: displaying a first ring on the display component, the first ring For indicating the focus parameter peak point value; correspondingly, the displaying a second frame on the display component, the second frame is used to indicate the current focus value, including: displaying a second on the display component a ring, the second ring is for indicating the current focus value; wherein the second ring and the first ring are concentric circles.

可选的，所述第一环的大小不变，所述第二环的大小随着所述对焦调节组件的调整位置的变化而变化。Optionally, the size of the first ring does not change, and the size of the second ring changes according to a change in an adjustment position of the focus adjustment component.

如图17所示，显示组件显示有对焦提示图标1700，对焦提示图标1700包括第一环1702和第二环1704，第一环1702用于指示对焦参数峰点值，第二环1704用于指示当前对焦值，即第一指示标志具体可以是第一环1702，第二指示标志具体可以是第二环1704。可选的，第一环1702的圆心和第二环1704的圆心重叠，即第一环1702和第二环1704是同心圆。第一环1702的大小不变，第二环1704的大小随着所述对焦调节组件的调整位置的变化而变化。第一环1702的半径和第二环1704的半径的差值d表示指示距离，该指示距离与所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值之间的差值相关。As shown in FIG. 17, the display component displays a focus prompt icon 1700. The focus prompt icon 1700 includes a first loop 1702 and a second loop 1704. The first loop 1702 is used to indicate a focus parameter peak point value, and the second loop 1704 is used to indicate The current focus value, that is, the first indicator flag may be the first ring 1702, and the second indicator flag may be the second ring 1704. Optionally, the center of the first ring 1702 and the center of the second ring 1704 overlap, that is, the first ring 1702 and the second ring 1704 are concentric. circle. The size of the first ring 1702 does not change, and the size of the second ring 1704 changes as the adjusted position of the focus adjustment assembly changes. The difference d between the radius of the first ring 1702 and the radius of the second ring 1704 represents an indication distance that is related to the difference between the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value.

所述在显示组件上显示第二环，包括：如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二环显示在所述第一环的里面；如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二环显示在所述第一环的外面；如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二环显示覆盖在所述第一环上。Displaying the second ring on the display component, comprising: if the current focus value is less than the focus parameter peak point value, displaying the second ring inside the first ring; if the current focus is If the value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, the second ring is displayed outside the first ring; if the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, the second ring is displayed Covering the first ring.

如图17所示，如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将第二环1704显示在第一环1702的里面。As shown in FIG. 17, if the current focus value is less than the focus parameter peak point value, the second ring 1704 is displayed inside the first ring 1702.

如图18所示，如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将第二环1704显示在第一环1702的外面。As shown in FIG. 18, if the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, the second ring 1704 is displayed outside of the first ring 1702.

如图19所示，如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将第二环1704显示覆盖在第一环1702上，即第二环1704和第一环1702重叠。As shown in FIG. 19, if the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, the second ring 1704 is displayed overlaid on the first ring 1702, ie, the second ring 1704 and the first ring 1702 overlap.

或者，所述在显示组件上显示第二环，包括：如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二环显示在所述第一环的里面；如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二环显示在所述第一环的外面；如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二环显示覆盖在所述第一环上。Or displaying the second ring on the display component, comprising: if the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, displaying the second ring inside the first ring; If the current focus value is smaller than the focus parameter peak point value, the second ring is displayed outside the first ring; if the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, then the second A ring display overlies the first ring.

例如，当所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值时，将将第二环1704显示在第一环1702的外面。当所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值时，将第二环1704显示在第一环1702的里面。当所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值时，将第二环1704显示覆盖在第一环1702上。For example, when the current focus value is less than the focus parameter peak point value, the second ring 1704 will be displayed outside of the first ring 1702. When the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, the second ring 1704 is displayed inside the first ring 1702. When the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, the second ring 1704 is displayed overlaid on the first ring 1702.

可选的，所述第一环为目标指示框，所述目标指示框用于指示选择对焦的对象。在对焦完成的预设时间之后，所述第二环消失。Optionally, the first ring is a target indication frame, and the target indication frame is used to indicate an object that selects focus. After the preset time of focusing completion, the second loop disappears.

例如，第一环1702为目标指示框，目标指示框用于指示选择对焦的对象。在对焦完成的预设时间之后，第二环1704消失。For example, the first ring 1702 is a target indication frame, and the target indication frame is used to indicate an object that selects focus. After the preset time for focusing completion, the second loop 1704 disappears.

在另外一些实施例中，步骤S501在显示组件上显示第一指示标志，所述第一指示标志用于指示所述对焦参数峰点值，包括：在显示组件上显示一线段，所述线段用于指示所述对焦参数峰点值；相应的，步骤S502在所述显示组件上显示第二指示标志，所述第二指示标志用于指示所述当前对焦值，包括：在显示组件上显示一半圆，所述半圆用于指示所述当前对焦值；其中，所述线段的中心和所述半圆的圆心重叠，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离包括所述半圆底部的直径与所述线段之间的夹角。In some other embodiments, step S501 displays a first indicator on the display component. The first indication flag is used to indicate the focus parameter peak point value, including: displaying a line segment on the display component, the line segment is used to indicate the focus parameter peak point value; correspondingly, step S502 is in the display Displaying a second indicator on the component, the second indicator is used to indicate the current focus value, comprising: displaying a half circle on the display component, the semicircle is used to indicate the current focus value; wherein the line segment The center of the circle overlaps with the center of the semicircle, and the indicated distance between the first indicator mark and the second indicator mark includes an angle between a diameter of the bottom of the semicircle and the line segment.

可选的，所述线段的位置不变；当所述对焦调节组件的调整位置变化时，所述半圆以其圆心为旋转中心旋转。Optionally, the position of the line segment is unchanged; when the adjustment position of the focus adjustment component is changed, the semicircle rotates with its center of rotation as a center of rotation.

如图20所示，显示组件显示有对焦提示图标2000，对焦提示图标2000包括一线段2002和一半圆2004，线段2002用于指示对焦参数峰点值，半圆2004用于指示当前对焦值，即第一指示标志具体可以是线段2002，第二指示标志具体可以是半圆2004。可选的，线段2002的中心和半圆2004的圆心重叠。线段2002的位置不变，当所述对焦调节组件的调整位置变化时，半圆2004以其圆心为旋转中心旋转，例如以其圆心为旋转中心顺时针转动或逆时针转动。半圆2004底部的直径2006与线段2002之间的夹角θ表示指示距离，该指示距离与所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值之间的差值相关。As shown in FIG. 20, the display component displays a focus prompt icon 2000, the focus prompt icon 2000 includes a line segment 2002 and a half circle 2004, the line segment 2002 is used to indicate the focus parameter peak point value, and the semicircle 2004 is used to indicate the current focus value, that is, the first An indicator may specifically be a line segment 2002, and the second indicator may be a semi-circle 2004. Alternatively, the center of the line segment 2002 and the center of the semicircle 2004 overlap. The position of the line segment 2002 does not change. When the adjustment position of the focus adjustment unit changes, the semicircle 2004 rotates with its center of rotation as a center of rotation, for example, clockwise or counterclockwise with its center of rotation as the center of rotation. The angle θ between the diameter 2006 at the bottom of the semicircle 2004 and the line segment 2002 represents an indication distance that is related to the difference between the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value.

如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则所述半圆底部的直径与所述线段之间的夹角是所述半圆以其圆心为旋转中心逆时针旋转形成的；如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则所述半圆底部的直径与所述线段之间的夹角是所述半圆以其圆心为旋转中心顺时针旋转形成的；如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则所述半圆底部的直径与所述线段重叠。If the current focus value is smaller than the focus parameter peak point value, the angle between the diameter of the semicircle bottom and the line segment is formed by the counterclockwise rotation of the semicircle with its center of rotation as a center of rotation; If the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, the angle between the diameter of the semicircle bottom and the line segment is formed by the clockwise rotation of the semicircle with its center of rotation as the center of rotation; if the current focus value Equal to the focus parameter peak point value, the diameter of the semicircle bottom overlaps the line segment.

如图20所示，如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则半圆2004以其圆心为旋转中心逆时针转动，半圆2004底部的直径2006与线段2002之间的夹角θ表是半圆2004以其圆心为旋转中心逆时针转动形成的。As shown in FIG. 20, if the current focus value is smaller than the focus parameter peak point value, the semicircle 2004 rotates counterclockwise with its center of rotation as the center of rotation, and the angle θ between the diameter 2006 of the bottom of the semicircle 2004 and the line segment 2002 It is formed by the counterclockwise rotation of the semicircle 2004 with its center of rotation as the center of rotation.

如图21所示，如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则半圆2004以其圆心为旋转中心顺时针转动，半圆2004底部的直径2006与线段2002之间的夹角θ表是半圆2004以其圆心为旋转中心顺时针转动形成的。As shown in FIG. 21, if the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, the semicircle 2004 rotates clockwise with its center of rotation as the center of rotation, and the diameter of the bottom of the semicircle 2004 is 2006 and The angle θ between the line segments 2002 is formed by the clockwise rotation of the semicircle 2004 with its center of rotation as the center of rotation.

如图22所示，如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则半圆2004底部的直径2006与线段2002重叠。As shown in FIG. 22, if the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, the diameter 2006 at the bottom of the semicircle 2004 overlaps with the line segment 2002.

或者，如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则所述半圆底部的直径与所述线段之间的夹角是所述半圆以其圆心为旋转中心逆时针旋转形成的；如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则所述半圆底部的直径与所述线段之间的夹角是所述半圆以其圆心为旋转中心顺时针旋转形成的；如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则所述半圆底部的直径与所述线段重叠。Alternatively, if the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, the angle between the diameter of the semicircle bottom and the line segment is formed by the counterclockwise rotation of the semicircle with its center of rotation as a center of rotation; If the current focus value is smaller than the focus parameter peak point value, the angle between the diameter of the semicircle bottom and the line segment is formed by the clockwise rotation of the semicircle with its center of rotation as a center of rotation; The focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, and the diameter of the semicircle bottom overlaps the line segment.

例如，当所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值时，半圆2004以其圆心为旋转中心顺时针转动，半圆2004底部的直径2006与线段2002之间的夹角θ表是半圆2004以其圆心为旋转中心顺时针转动形成的。当所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值时，半圆2004以其圆心为旋转中心逆时针转动，半圆2004底部的直径2006与线段2002之间的夹角θ表是半圆2004以其圆心为旋转中心逆时针转动形成的。当所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值时，半圆2004底部的直径2006与线段2002重叠。For example, when the current focus value is smaller than the focus parameter peak point value, the semicircle 2004 rotates clockwise with its center of rotation as a center of rotation, and the angle θ between the diameter 2006 at the bottom of the semicircle 2004 and the line segment 2002 is a semicircle 2004. The center of the circle is formed by clockwise rotation of the center of rotation. When the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, the semicircle 2004 rotates counterclockwise with its center of rotation as the center of rotation, and the angle θ between the diameter 2006 of the bottom of the semicircle 2004 and the line segment 2002 is a semicircle 2004 with its center It is formed by rotating the center of rotation counterclockwise. When the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, the diameter 2006 at the bottom of the semicircle 2004 overlaps with the line segment 2002.

可选的，所述线段和所述半圆位于目标指示环内，所述目标指示环用于指示选择对焦的对象。所述目标指示环的半径大于或等于所述半圆的半径。Optionally, the line segment and the semicircle are located in a target indicating ring, and the target indicating ring is used to indicate an object that selects focus. The radius of the target indicating ring is greater than or equal to the radius of the semicircle.

如图20-图22所示，2008表示目标指示环，可见，线段2002和半圆2004位于目标指示环2008内，目标指示环2008用于指示选择对焦的对象，目标指示环2008的半径大于或等于半圆2004的半径。As shown in FIG. 20-22, 2008 denotes a target indicating ring. It can be seen that the line segment 2002 and the semicircle 2004 are located in the target indicating ring 2008, and the target indicating ring 2008 is used to indicate the object to select the focus. The radius of the target indicating ring 2008 is greater than or equal to The radius of the semicircle 2004.

在另外一些实施例中，步骤S501在显示组件上显示第一指示标志，所述第一指示标志用于指示所述对焦参数峰点值，包括：在显示组件上显示第一线段，所述第一线段用于指示所述对焦参数峰点值；相应的，步骤S502在所述显示组件上显示第二指示标志，所述第二指示标志用于指示所述当前对焦值，包括：在显示组件上显示第二线段，所述第二线段用于指示所述当前对焦值；其中，所述第一线段的中心和所述第二线段的中心重叠，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离包括所述第一线段和所述第二线段之间的夹角。In some other embodiments, step S501 displays a first indication flag on the display component, the first indication flag is used to indicate the focus parameter peak point value, including: displaying a first line segment on the display component, The first line segment is used to indicate the focus parameter peak point value; correspondingly, step S502 displays a second indicator mark on the display component, and the second indicator flag is used to indicate the current focus value, including: Displaying a second line segment on the display component, the second line segment is for indicating the current focus value; wherein a center of the first line segment and the second line The centers of the segments overlap, and the indicated distance between the first indicator and the second indicator includes an angle between the first line segment and the second line segment.

可选的，所述第一线段的位置不变；当所述对焦调节组件的调整位置变化时，所述第二线段以其中心为旋转中心旋转。Optionally, the position of the first line segment is unchanged; when the adjustment position of the focus adjustment component is changed, the second line segment rotates with its center as a center of rotation.

如图23所示，显示组件显示有对焦提示图标2300，对焦提示图标2300包括第一线段2302和第二线段2304，第一线段2302用于指示对焦参数峰点值，第二线段2304用于指示当前对焦值，即第一指示标志具体可以是第一线段2302，第二指示标志具体可以是第二线段2304。可选的，第一线段2302的中心和第二线段2304的中心重叠。第一线段2302的位置不变，当所述对焦调节组件的调整位置变化时，第二线段2304以其中心为旋转中心旋转，例如以其中心为旋转中心顺时针转动或逆时针转动。第一线段2302与第二线段2304之间的夹角θ表示指示距离，该指示距离与所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值之间的差值相关。As shown in FIG. 23, the display component displays a focus prompt icon 2300. The focus prompt icon 2300 includes a first line segment 2302 and a second line segment 2304. The first line segment 2302 is used to indicate a focus parameter peak point value, and the second line segment 2304 is used. The first indication flag may be specifically the first line segment 2302, and the second indication flag may be the second line segment 2304. Optionally, the center of the first line segment 2302 and the center of the second line segment 2304 overlap. The position of the first line segment 2302 does not change. When the adjustment position of the focus adjustment assembly changes, the second line segment 2304 rotates with its center as the center of rotation, for example, clockwise or counterclockwise with its center as the center of rotation. The angle θ between the first line segment 2302 and the second line segment 2304 represents an indication distance that is related to a difference between the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value.

如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则所述第一线段和所述第二线段之间的夹角是所述第二线段以其中心为旋转中心逆时针旋转形成的；如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则所述第一线段和所述第二线段之间的夹角是所述第二线段以其中心为旋转中心顺时针旋转形成的；如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则所述第一线段和所述第二线段重叠。If the current focus value is smaller than the focus parameter peak point value, an angle between the first line segment and the second line segment is formed by the counterclockwise rotation of the second line segment with its center as a center of rotation If the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, an angle between the first line segment and the second line segment is formed by clockwise rotation of the second line segment with its center as a center of rotation If the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, the first line segment and the second line segment overlap.

如图23所示，如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则第二线段2304以其中心为旋转中心逆时针转动，第一线段2302与第二线段2304之间的夹角θ是第二线段2304以其中心为旋转中心逆时针转动形成的。As shown in FIG. 23, if the current focus value is smaller than the focus parameter peak point value, the second line segment 2304 rotates counterclockwise with its center as the center of rotation, and the clip between the first line segment 2302 and the second line segment 2304 The angle θ is formed by the second line segment 2304 being rotated counterclockwise with its center as the center of rotation.

如图24所示，如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则第二线段2304以其中心为旋转中心顺时针转动，第一线段2302与第二线段2304之间的夹角θ是第二线段2304以其中心为旋转中心顺时针转动形成的。As shown in FIG. 24, if the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, the second line segment 2304 rotates clockwise with its center as the center of rotation, and the clip between the first line segment 2302 and the second line segment 2304 The angle θ is formed by the second line segment 2304 being rotated clockwise with its center as the center of rotation.

如图25所示，如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则第一线段2302与第二线段2304重叠。As shown in FIG. 25, if the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, the first line segment 2302 overlaps with the second line segment 2304.

或者，如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则所述第一线段和所述第二线段之间的夹角是所述第二线段以其中心为旋转中心逆时针旋转形成的；如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则所述第一线段和所述第二线段之间的夹角是所述第二线段以其中心为旋转中心顺时针旋转形成的；如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则所述第一线段和所述第二线段重叠。Or if the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, the first An angle between the line segment and the second line segment is formed by the counterclockwise rotation of the second line segment with its center as a center of rotation; if the current focus value is less than the focus parameter peak point value, the first An angle between the line segment and the second line segment is formed by clockwise rotation of the second line segment with its center as a center of rotation; if the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, the first A line segment and the second line segment overlap.

例如，当所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值时，第二线段2304以其中心为旋转中心顺时针转动，第一线段2302与第二线段2304之间的夹角θ是第二线段2304以其中心为旋转中心顺时针转动形成的。当所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值时，第二线段2304以其中心为旋转中心逆时针转动，第一线段2302与第二线段2304之间的夹角θ是第二线段2304以其中心为旋转中心逆时针转动形成的。当所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值时，第一线段2302与第二线段2304重叠。For example, when the current focus value is smaller than the focus parameter peak point value, the second line segment 2304 rotates clockwise with its center as the center of rotation, and the angle θ between the first line segment 2302 and the second line segment 2304 is the first The second line segment 2304 is formed by clockwise rotation with its center as the center of rotation. When the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, the second line segment 2304 rotates counterclockwise with its center as the center of rotation, and the angle θ between the first line segment 2302 and the second line segment 2304 is the second line segment. 2304 is formed by rotating its center as a center of rotation counterclockwise. When the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, the first line segment 2302 overlaps with the second line segment 2304.

可选的，所述第一线段和所述第二线段位于目标指示环内，所述目标指示环用于指示选择对焦的对象。Optionally, the first line segment and the second line segment are located in a target indication ring, and the target indication ring is used to indicate an object that selects focus.

如图23-图25所示，2306表示目标指示环，可见，第一线段2302与第二线段2304位于目标指示环2306内。As shown in Figures 23-25, 2306 represents the target indicating ring. As can be seen, the first line segment 2302 and the second line segment 2304 are located within the target indicating ring 2306.

可选的，所述目标指示环的直径大于或等于所述第一线段的长度；或者所述目标指示环的直径大于或等于所述第二线段的长度。Optionally, the target indicating ring has a diameter greater than or equal to a length of the first line segment; or the target indicating ring has a diameter greater than or equal to a length of the second line segment.

例如，目标指示环2306的直径大于或等于第一线段2302的长度，或者，目标指示环2306的直径大于或等于第二线段2304的长度。For example, the diameter of the target indicating ring 2306 is greater than or equal to the length of the first line segment 2302, or the diameter of the target indicating ring 2306 is greater than or equal to the length of the second line segment 2304.

在本实施例中，显示组件可以是拍摄设备100的取景器、也可以是拍摄设备100的屏幕，还可以是远程控制器110的屏幕。In the present embodiment, the display component may be a viewfinder of the photographing apparatus 100, a screen of the photographing apparatus 100, or a screen of the remote controller 110.

可以理解，所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值时，显示组件显示的当前图像处于合焦状态。如果所述当前对焦值不等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则显示组件显示的当前图像离焦，此时需要根据显示组件上显示的第一指示标志和第二指示标志之间的指示距离，调整对焦调节组件106或对焦调节组件114，以减小第一指示标志和第二指示标志之间的指示距离，从而使当前图像合焦。It can be understood that when the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, the current image displayed by the display component is in a focus state. If the current focus value is not equal to the focus parameter peak point value, the current image displayed by the display component is out of focus, and according to the indicated distance between the first indicator mark and the second indicator mark displayed on the display component, The focus adjustment component 106 or the focus adjustment component 114 is adjusted to reduce the indicated distance between the first indicator mark and the second indicator mark to focus the current image.

本实施例提供了多种形式的对焦提示图标，以提示用户当前图像是否合焦，以及如何调整对焦调节组件以使当前图像合焦，不仅可以使用户在手动对焦时，快速准确的找到对焦对象合焦时的对焦位置，同时还增加了对焦提示图标显示的灵活性。The embodiment provides various forms of focus prompt icons to prompt the user whether the current image is in focus, and how to adjust the focus adjustment component to focus the current image, not only can be used When manually focusing, the user quickly and accurately finds the focus position when the focus object is in focus, and also increases the flexibility of the focus indicator icon display.

本发明实施例提供一种手动对焦的提示方法。图26为本发明另一实施例提供的手动对焦的提示方法的流程图。如图26所示，在图3所示实施例的基础上，本实施例中的方法，可以包括：Embodiments of the present invention provide a method for prompting manual focus. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of a method for prompting manual focus according to another embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 26, on the basis of the embodiment shown in FIG. 3, the method in this embodiment may include:

步骤S2601、计算当前图像中对焦对象在合焦时的对焦参数峰点值。Step S2601: Calculate a focus parameter peak point value of the focus object in the current image when the focus is in focus.

步骤S2601与步骤S301的具体原理和实现方式均类似，此处不再赘述。The specific principles and implementation manners of step S2601 and step S301 are similar, and details are not described herein again.

步骤S2602、计算对焦调节组件当前的调整位置对应的当前对焦值。Step S2602: Calculate a current focus value corresponding to a current adjustment position of the focus adjustment component.

步骤S2602与步骤S302的具体原理和实现方式均类似，此处不再赘述。Step S2602 is similar to the specific principle and implementation manner of step S302, and details are not described herein again.

步骤S2603、在显示组件上显示第一指示标志，所述第一指示标志用于指示所述对焦参数峰点值；在所述显示组件上显示第二指示标志，所述第二指示标志用于指示所述当前对焦值。Step S2603, displaying a first indication flag on the display component, the first indication flag is used to indicate the focus parameter peak point value; displaying a second indication flag on the display component, the second indication flag is used to Indicates the current focus value.

在显示组件上显示第一指示标志和第二指示标志的方式具体如图6-图25所示，此处不再赘述。The manner of displaying the first indication mark and the second indication mark on the display component is specifically as shown in FIG. 6 to FIG. 25, and details are not described herein again.

可选的，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离与所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值之间的差值成比例。Optionally, an indication distance between the first indicator flag and the second indicator flag is proportional to a difference between the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value.

以图11为例，第一指示标志1104显示在刻度图像1102的中间位置，如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将第二指示标志1106显示在第一指示标志1104的左侧。第一指示标志1104和第二指示标志1106之间的距离与所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值之间的差值成比例，也就是说，所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值之间的差值越大，第一指示标志1104和第二指示标志1106之间的距离越大；所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值之间的差值越小，第一指示标志1104和第二指示标志1106之间的距离越小。Taking FIG. 11 as an example, the first indication mark 1104 is displayed at an intermediate position of the scale image 1102, and if the current focus value is smaller than the focus parameter peak point value, the second indication mark 1106 is displayed at the first indication mark 1104. Left side. The distance between the first indicator mark 1104 and the second indicator mark 1106 is proportional to the difference between the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value, that is, the focus parameter peak point value and The greater the difference between the current focus values, the greater the distance between the first indicator flag 1104 and the second indicator flag 1106; the smaller the difference between the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value The smaller the distance between the first indicator flag 1104 and the second indicator flag 1106.

当用户在显示组件上观测到第一指示标志1104和第二指示标志1106 不重合时，用户可手动调整对焦调节组件106或对焦调节组件114，以减小第一指示标志和第二指示标志之间的指示距离。当手动对焦完成时即当前对焦值正好等于对焦参数峰点值时，例如，第一指示标志1104和第二指示标志1106重合，用户可能不再希望看到第一指示标志1104和/或第二指示标志1106。可选的，在对焦完成的预设时间之后，第一指示标志1104和/或第二指示标志1106消失。可选的，在第一指示标志1104和第二指示标志1106重合之后的预设时间内，控制第一指示标志1104和/或第二指示标志1106消失，预设时间不限于1秒、2秒、或3秒等。When the user observes the first indicator 1104 and the second indicator 1106 on the display component When not coincident, the user can manually adjust the focus adjustment component 106 or the focus adjustment component 114 to reduce the indicated distance between the first indicator and the second indicator. When the manual focus is completed, that is, when the current focus value is exactly equal to the focus parameter peak point value, for example, the first indicator flag 1104 and the second indicator flag 1106 coincide, the user may no longer wish to see the first indicator flag 1104 and/or the second. Indicator 1106. Optionally, after the preset time of focusing completion, the first indicator flag 1104 and/or the second indicator flag 1106 disappear. Optionally, after the first indication flag 1104 and the second indication flag 1106 overlap, the first indication flag 1104 and/or the second indication flag 1106 are controlled to disappear, and the preset time is not limited to 1 second, 2 seconds. , or 3 seconds, etc.

步骤S2604、将所述当前图像显示在显示组件上，其中，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志覆盖在所述当前图像上。Step S2604: Display the current image on the display component, wherein the first indication mark and the second indication mark are overlaid on the current image.

所述显示组件包括屏幕。The display component includes a screen.

在本实施例中，显示组件可以是拍摄设备100的屏幕，也可以是远程控制器110的屏幕。在本实施例中，该显示组件还可以显示拍摄设备100拍摄的当前图像，该当前图像中包括对焦对象，此时，当前图像和上述实施例所述的任一种对焦提示图标将同时显示在该显示组件上。可选的，对焦提示图标可覆盖或叠加在当前图像上。这样，用户在手动对焦的同时可以观看到当前图像，方便用户检测对焦结果。In the present embodiment, the display component may be the screen of the photographing apparatus 100 or the screen of the remote controller 110. In this embodiment, the display component may further display a current image captured by the photographing apparatus 100, where the current image includes a focus object, and at this time, the current image and any one of the focus prompt icons described in the above embodiments are simultaneously displayed. On the display component. Optionally, the focus alert icon can be overlaid or superimposed on the current image. In this way, the user can view the current image while manually focusing, which is convenient for the user to detect the focus result.

步骤S2605、在所述显示组件上显示用于提示对焦对象的目标指示框。Step S2605: Display a target indication frame for prompting the focus object on the display component.

在一些实施例中，显示组件上还可以显示用于提示对焦对象的目标指示框，所述目标指示框包括目标提示环。例如，当前图像、当前图像中对焦对象的目标指示框和上述实施例所述的任一种对焦提示图标将同时显示在该显示组件上。In some embodiments, a target indication frame for prompting the focused object may also be displayed on the display component, the target indication frame including a target cueing ring. For example, the current image, the target pointing frame of the focused object in the current image, and any of the focus alert icons described in the above embodiments will be simultaneously displayed on the display component.

所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志中的至少一个显示在所述目标指示框之外、距离所述目标指示框在预设距离范围内的位置。例如，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志中的至少一个显示在所述目标指示框之外，并且在所述目标指示框的附近。At least one of the first indication mark and the second indication mark is displayed at a position outside the target indication frame within a preset distance from the target indication frame. For example, at least one of the first indicator mark and the second indicator mark is displayed outside the target indication frame and in the vicinity of the target indication frame.

或者，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志中的至少一个显示在所述目标指示框之内。Alternatively, at least one of the first indicator flag and the second indicator flag is displayed within the target indication frame.

再或者，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志中的至少一个显示在所述目标指示框上。Or alternatively, at least one of the first indicator mark and the second indicator mark is displayed On the target indication box.

在对焦完成的预设时间之后，所述目标指示框消失。可选的，在所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值时刻之后的预设时间内，控制目标指示框消失，预设时间不限于1秒、2秒、或3秒等。After the preset time for focusing completion, the target indication frame disappears. Optionally, the control target indication frame disappears within a preset time after the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point time, and the preset time is not limited to 1 second, 2 seconds, or 3 seconds.

本实施例通过将当前图像和对焦提示图标同时显示在显示组件上，可使用户在手动对焦的同时观看当前图像是否清晰，方便了用户检测对焦结果。In this embodiment, by displaying the current image and the focus prompt icon on the display component at the same time, the user can watch whether the current image is clear while manually focusing, which is convenient for the user to detect the focus result.

本发明实施例提供一种手动对焦的提示方法。在上述实施例的基础上，本实施例中的方法还可以包括：根据所述对焦调节组件的调整位置的变化，更新所述当前对焦值。Embodiments of the present invention provide a method for prompting manual focus. Based on the foregoing embodiment, the method in this embodiment may further include: updating the current focus value according to a change in an adjustment position of the focus adjustment component.

例如，用户在调整对焦调节组件106或对焦调节组件114时，当前对焦值随着对焦调节组件106或对焦调节组件114的调整位置的改变而改变。For example, when the user adjusts the focus adjustment component 106 or the focus adjustment component 114, the current focus value changes as the adjustment position of the focus adjustment component 106 or the focus adjustment component 114 changes.

所述根据所述对焦调节组件的调整位置的变化，更新所述当前对焦值，包括：根据对焦环的转动角度，更新所述当前对焦值。例如，对焦调节组件106包括环绕光学组件102的对焦环，当对焦环转动时，当前对焦值会发生改变。Updating the current focus value according to the change of the adjustment position of the focus adjustment component comprises: updating the current focus value according to a rotation angle of the focus ring. For example, the focus adjustment assembly 106 includes a focus ring that surrounds the optical assembly 102, and the current focus value changes as the focus ring rotates.

当前对焦值改变时，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离随着改变，也就是说，对焦调节组件106或对焦调节组件114的调整位置改变时，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离随着改变。When the current focus value is changed, the indication distance between the first indication mark and the second indication mark changes, that is, when the adjustment position of the focus adjustment component 106 or the focus adjustment component 114 is changed, the first The indication distance between an indication mark and the second indication mark changes.

在一些实施例中，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离随着所述对焦调节组件的调整位置的变化而均匀变化。对焦调节组件的调整位置的变化也可称为对焦调节组件的调整量，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离随着对焦调节组件的调整量而均匀变化。例如，对焦调节组件106包括环绕光学组件102的对焦环，此时，对焦调节组件106的调整位置的变化即调整量具体可以是该对焦环的转动角度，该对焦环的转动角度是指该对焦环在转动时其角度的变化量。该对焦环在转动时，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离随着变化，可选的，该指示距离的变化量与该对焦环的转动角度成正比，即所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离随着对焦环的转动角度均匀变化。In some embodiments, the indication distance between the first indicator mark and the second indicator mark varies uniformly as the adjusted position of the focus adjustment component changes. The change in the adjustment position of the focus adjustment component may also be referred to as an adjustment amount of the focus adjustment component, and the indication distance between the first indication mark and the second indication mark uniformly changes with the adjustment amount of the focus adjustment component. For example, the focus adjustment component 106 includes a focus ring that surrounds the optical component 102. At this time, the change of the adjustment position of the focus adjustment component 106, that is, the adjustment amount may specifically be the rotation angle of the focus ring, and the rotation angle of the focus ring refers to the focus. The amount of change in the angle of the ring as it rotates. When the focus ring is rotated, between the first indicator mark and the second indicator mark The indication distance varies, and optionally, the amount of change of the indication distance is proportional to the rotation angle of the focus ring, that is, the indication distance between the first indication mark and the second indication mark follows the focus ring The angle of rotation changes evenly.

在另外一些实施例中，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离随着所述对焦调节组件的调整位置的变化而非均匀变化。例如，当所述第二指示标志越接近于所述第一指示标志时，即当前对焦值和对焦参数峰点值的差值的绝对值越小时，所述对焦调节组件相同的调整量引起的指示距离的变化量越大。例如，对焦调节组件106包括环绕光学组件102的对焦环，此时，对焦调节组件106的调整位置的变化即调整量具体可以是该对焦环的转动角度。所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离随着对焦环的转动角度非均匀变化。例如，当所述第二指示标志越接近于所述第一指示标志时，对焦环转动相同的角度引起的指示距离的变化量越大。In still other embodiments, the indicated distance between the first indicator and the second indicator changes non-uniformly as the adjusted position of the focus adjustment component changes. For example, when the second indication mark is closer to the first indication mark, that is, the smaller the absolute value of the difference between the current focus value and the focus parameter peak point value, the same adjustment amount of the focus adjustment component is caused. The greater the amount of change in the indicated distance. For example, the focus adjustment component 106 includes a focus ring that surrounds the optical component 102. At this time, the change of the adjustment position of the focus adjustment component 106, that is, the adjustment amount may specifically be the rotation angle of the focus ring. The indication distance between the first indication mark and the second indication mark varies non-uniformly with the rotation angle of the focus ring. For example, when the second indication mark is closer to the first indication mark, the amount of change in the indication distance caused by the same angle of rotation of the focus ring is larger.

在一些实施例中，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离的变化率随着所述指示距离的减小而增大。对焦调节组件相同的调整量引起的指示距离的变化量可以称为指示距离的变化率，指示距离的变化率可以随着指示距离的减小而逐渐增大，即在所述第二指示标志逐渐接近所述第一指示标志的过程中，指示距离的变化率逐渐增大。例如，对焦调节组件106包括环绕光学组件102的对焦环，此时，指示距离的变化率可以是对焦环转动相同的角度引起的指示距离的变化量。In some embodiments, a rate of change of the indicated distance between the first indicator mark and the second indicator mark increases as the indicated distance decreases. The amount of change in the indication distance caused by the same adjustment amount of the focus adjustment component may be referred to as a change rate of the indication distance, and the rate of change of the indication distance may gradually increase as the indicated distance decreases, that is, the second indication mark gradually In the process of approaching the first indicator mark, the rate of change of the indication distance is gradually increased. For example, the focus adjustment component 106 includes a focus ring that surrounds the optical component 102. At this time, the rate of change of the indication distance may be an amount of change in the indication distance caused by the same angle of rotation of the focus ring.

在另外一些实施例中，当所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离在不同预设范围内时，所述指示距离的变化率不同，所述预设范围和所述指示距离的变化率一一对应。如图27所示，第二指示标志1106在位置1时，第二指示标志1106和第一指示标志1104之间的指示距离为d1；当第二指示标志1106在位置2时，第二指示标志1106和第一指示标志1104之间的指示距离为d2；当第二指示标志1106在位置3时，第二指示标志1106和第一指示标志1104之间的指示距离为d3；当第二指示标志1106在位置4时，第二指示标志1106和第一指示标志1104之间的指示距离为d4。可见，d1、d2、d3、d4逐渐减小，当第二指示标志1106位于位置1和位置2之间时，指示距离在d1到d2的范围内，在这个范围内，指示距离的变化率不变即对焦调节组件相同的调整量引起的指示距离的变化量不变，当指示距离在d1到d2的范围内，指示距离的变化率记为r1；同理，当第二指示标志1106位于位置2和位置3之间时，指示距离在d2到d3的范围内，指示距离的变化率不变，记为r2；当第二指示标志1106位于位置3和位置4之间时，指示距离在d3到d4的范围内，指示距离的变化率不变，记为r3；当第二指示标志1106位于位置4和第一指示标志1104之间时，指示距离在d4到0的范围内，指示距离的变化率不变，记为r4。在所述第二指示标志逐渐接近所述第一指示标志的过程中，r1、r2、r3、r4依次递增。In some other embodiments, when the indication distance between the first indication mark and the second indication mark is within a different preset range, the change rate of the indication distance is different, the preset range and the The rate of change of the indicated distances corresponds one-to-one. As shown in FIG. 27, when the second indication mark 1106 is at the position 1, the indication distance between the second indication mark 1106 and the first indication mark 1104 is d1; when the second indication mark 1106 is at the position 2, the second indication mark The indicated distance between 1106 and the first indicator 1104 is d2; when the second indicator 1106 is at position 3, the indicated distance between the second indicator 1106 and the first indicator 1104 is d3; when the second indicator 1106, at position 4, the indicated distance between the second indicator 1106 and the first indicator 1104 is d4. It can be seen that d1, d2, d3, and d4 are gradually decreased. When the second indication mark 1106 is located between the position 1 and the position 2, the indication distance is in the range of d1 to d2, Within this range, the rate of change of the indicated distance does not change, that is, the amount of change of the indicated distance caused by the same adjustment amount of the focus adjustment component does not change. When the indicated distance is in the range of d1 to d2, the rate of change of the indicated distance is recorded as r1; For example, when the second indication mark 1106 is located between the position 2 and the position 3, the indication distance is in the range of d2 to d3, indicating that the rate of change of the distance does not change, denoted as r2; when the second indication mark 1106 is located at the position 3 and When the position is between 4, the indication distance is in the range of d3 to d4, the rate of change of the indication distance is unchanged, denoted as r3; when the second indication mark 1106 is located between the position 4 and the first indication mark 1104, the indication distance is In the range of d4 to 0, the rate of change of the indicated distance is unchanged, and is denoted as r4. In the process in which the second indicator is gradually approaching the first indicator, r1, r2, r3, and r4 are sequentially incremented.

所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离的变化率包括所述对焦环转动单位角度时所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离的变化量。例如，对焦调节组件106包括环绕光学组件102的对焦环，此时，指示距离的变化率可以是对焦环转动单位角度引起的指示距离的变化量。a rate of change of the indicated distance between the first indicator and the second indicator includes a change in the indicated distance between the first indicator and the second indicator when the focus ring is rotated by a unit angle the amount. For example, the focus adjustment component 106 includes a focus ring that surrounds the optical component 102. At this time, the rate of change of the indication distance may be an amount of change in the indication distance caused by the unit angle of the focus ring rotation.

本实施例中通过第一指示标志和第二指示标志之间的指示距离随着对焦调节组件的调整量非均匀变化，例如当第二指示标志越接近于第一指示标志时，对焦调节组件相同的调整量引起的指示距离的变化量越大，可提高对焦指示的显示灵敏度，也就是说，当第二指示标志即将接近于第一指示标志时，用户对焦调节组件轻微的调整，例如将对焦环转动相对较小的角度，将导致显示组件上显示的指示距离出现相对较大的变化，从而使得用户可以清楚的观测到对焦位置的变化，提高了手动对焦的精确度。In this embodiment, the indication distance between the first indication mark and the second indication mark varies non-uniformly with the adjustment amount of the focus adjustment component, for example, when the second indication mark is closer to the first indication mark, the focus adjustment component is the same The larger the amount of change in the indicated distance caused by the adjustment amount, the higher the display sensitivity of the focus indication, that is, when the second indicator is about to approach the first indicator, the user's focus adjustment component is slightly adjusted, for example, focusing Rotation of the ring at a relatively small angle will result in a relatively large change in the indicated distance displayed on the display assembly, allowing the user to clearly observe changes in the focus position and improve the accuracy of manual focus.

本发明实施例提供一种手动对焦的提示方法。在上述实施例的基础上，对焦距离随着所述对焦调节组件的调整位置的变化而均匀变化。例如，用户在调整对焦调节组件106或对焦调节组件114时，拍摄设备的对焦距离随着对焦调节组件106或对焦调节组件114的调整位置的改变而改变。可选的，拍摄设备的对焦距离随着对焦调节组件106或对焦调节组件114的调整位置的改变而均匀变化。Embodiments of the present invention provide a method for prompting manual focus. On the basis of the above embodiment, the focus distance changes uniformly with the change of the adjustment position of the focus adjustment unit. For example, when the user adjusts the focus adjustment component 106 or the focus adjustment component 114, the focus distance of the photographing device changes as the adjustment position of the focus adjustment component 106 or the focus adjustment component 114 changes. Alternatively, the focus distance of the photographing device changes uniformly as the adjusted position of the focus adjustment component 106 or the focus adjustment component 114 changes.

例如，对焦调节组件106包括环绕光学组件102的对焦环，此时，对焦调节组件106的调整位置的变化即调整量具体可以是该对焦环的转动角度，该对焦环的转动角度是指该对焦环在转动时其角度的变化量。此时，对焦距离随着对焦环的转动角度均匀变化。For example, the focus adjustment assembly 106 includes a focus ring that surrounds the optical assembly 102, at this point, The change of the adjustment position of the focus adjustment component 106, that is, the adjustment amount may specifically be the rotation angle of the focus ring, and the rotation angle of the focus ring refers to the change amount of the angle of the focus ring when it is rotated. At this time, the focusing distance changes uniformly with the rotation angle of the focus ring.

在其他实施例中，对焦距离随着所述对焦调节组件的调整位置的变化而非均匀变化。可选的，所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值之间的差值越小，相同的调整位置的变化量引起的对焦距离的变化量越小。In other embodiments, the focus distance varies non-uniformly with changes in the adjusted position of the focus adjustment assembly. Optionally, the smaller the difference between the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value is, the smaller the amount of change in the focus distance caused by the change amount of the same adjustment position is.

例如，对焦调节组件106包括环绕光学组件102的对焦环，此时，对焦调节组件106的调整位置的变化即调整量具体可以是该对焦环的转动角度。对焦距离随着对焦环的转动角度非均匀变化。具体的，所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值之间的差值越小，相同的转动角度引起的对焦距离的变化量越小。例如，当所述第二指示标志越接近于所述第一指示标志时，对焦环转动相同的角度引起的对焦距离的变化量越小。For example, the focus adjustment component 106 includes a focus ring that surrounds the optical component 102. At this time, the change of the adjustment position of the focus adjustment component 106, that is, the adjustment amount may specifically be the rotation angle of the focus ring. The focus distance varies non-uniformly with the angle of rotation of the focus ring. Specifically, the smaller the difference between the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value is, the smaller the amount of change in the focus distance caused by the same rotation angle is. For example, when the second indicator is closer to the first indicator, the amount of change in the focus distance caused by the same angle of rotation of the focus ring is smaller.

可以理解，对焦调节组件相同的调整量例如对焦环转动相同的角度引起的对焦距离的变化量可以称为对焦距离的变化率。It can be understood that the same adjustment amount of the focus adjustment component, for example, the amount of change in the focus distance caused by the same angle of rotation of the focus ring can be referred to as the rate of change of the focus distance.

在一些实施例中，在所述第二指示标志逐渐接近所述第一指示标志的过程中，对焦距离的变化率逐渐增大。In some embodiments, the rate of change of the focus distance gradually increases as the second indicator is gradually approaching the first indicator.

在另外一些实施例中，当所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离在不同预设范围内时，对焦距离的变化率不同，预设范围和对焦距离的变化率一一对应。如图27所示，当第二指示标志1106位于位置1和位置2之间时，对焦距离的变化率记为T1；当第二指示标志1106位于位置2和位置3之间时，对焦距离的变化率记为T2；当第二指示标志1106位于位置3和位置4之间时，对焦距离的变化率记为T3；当第二指示标志1106位于位置4和第一指示标志1104之间时，对焦距离的变化率记为T4。在所述第二指示标志逐渐接近所述第一指示标志的过程中，T1、T2、T3、T4依次减小。In some other embodiments, when the indication distance between the first indicator flag and the second indicator flag is within a different preset range, the rate of change of the focus distance is different, and the rate of change of the preset range and the focus distance One-to-one correspondence. As shown in FIG. 27, when the second indicator 1106 is located between the position 1 and the position 2, the rate of change of the focus distance is denoted as T1; when the second indicator 1106 is located between the position 2 and the position 3, the focus distance The rate of change is denoted as T2; when the second indicator 1106 is located between position 3 and position 4, the rate of change of the focus distance is denoted as T3; when the second indicator 1106 is located between position 4 and the first indicator 1104, The rate of change of the focus distance is recorded as T4. In the process in which the second indicator is gradually approaching the first indicator, T1, T2, T3, and T4 are sequentially decreased.

本实施例通过对焦距离随着所述对焦调节组件的调整位置的变化而非均匀变化，例如当第二指示标志越接近于第一指示标志时，对焦调节组件相同的调整量引起的对焦距离的变化量越小，可提高手动对焦的操作灵敏度，也就是说，当第二指示标志即将接近于第一指示标志时，为了使对焦距离发生相同的变化，用户需要增加对焦调节组件的调整量，从而使得用户可以更精细地调整对焦距离，提高了手动对焦的精确度。In this embodiment, the focus distance is not uniformly changed as the adjustment position of the focus adjustment component changes, for example, when the second indication mark is closer to the first indication mark, the focus adjustment amount caused by the same adjustment amount of the focus adjustment component The smaller the amount of change, the higher the operational sensitivity of manual focus, that is, when the second indicator is about to approach the first indicator, in order to make the same change in the focus distance, the user needs to increase the adjustment amount of the focus adjustment component. This allows the user to fine-tune the focus distance and improve the accuracy of manual focus.

本发明实施例提供一种手动对焦的提示方法。图28为本发明另一实施例提供的手动对焦的提示方法的流程图。如图28所示，在上述实施例的基础上，本实施例中的方法还可以包括：Embodiments of the present invention provide a method for prompting manual focus. FIG. 28 is a flowchart of a method for prompting manual focus according to another embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 28, based on the foregoing embodiment, the method in this embodiment may further include:

步骤S2801、检测拍摄设备是否发生移动。In step S2801, it is detected whether or not the photographing device has moved.

所述检测拍摄设备是否发生移动，包括如下几种可行的实现方式：The detecting whether the shooting device moves, includes the following feasible implementation manners:

一种可行的实现方式是：采用所述拍摄设备设置的运动传感器，检测拍摄设备是否发生移动。One possible implementation manner is to detect whether the shooting device has moved by using a motion sensor provided by the photographing device.

具体的，拍摄设备100可设置有运动传感器，所述运动传感器包括如下至少一种：陀螺仪、加速度计、惯性测量单元。通过运动传感器可检测出拍摄设备100是否发生移动。Specifically, the photographing apparatus 100 may be provided with a motion sensor, and the motion sensor includes at least one of the following: a gyroscope, an accelerometer, and an inertial measurement unit. Whether or not the photographing apparatus 100 has moved can be detected by the motion sensor.

另一种可行的实现方式是：检测当前图像相对于显示组件是否发生移动。Another possible implementation is to detect if the current image has moved relative to the display component.

具体的，根据图像处理方法分析拍摄设备100是否发生移动，例如，根据显示组件的显示区域中显示的图像相对于该显示区域是否发生了移动，而确定出拍摄设备100是否发生移动。Specifically, it is analyzed according to the image processing method whether or not the photographing apparatus 100 has moved. For example, whether or not the photographing apparatus 100 has moved is determined according to whether or not the image displayed in the display area of the display component has moved relative to the display area.

当拍摄设备移动时，例如当拍摄设备100转动了一定角度或平移了一段距离，此时，如图4所示的多个聚焦区域404可能不再与对焦对象406重叠，导致对焦参数峰点值不再有效。此时，用户可能希望拍摄设备聚焦于不同的目标对象，或者用户可能希望改变图像的组成，但拍摄设备仍聚焦于同一目标对象。对于前一种情况，可以使用相同的聚焦区域，但可能需要计算新的对焦参数峰点值。对于后一种情况，可能需要选择与目标对象相对应的不同的聚焦区域，并且可能需要计算新的对焦参数峰点值。有时候，当拍摄设备100沿着拍摄设备100和目标对象之间的连线移动时，如图4所示的多个聚焦区域404仍可以与对焦对象406重叠，但是拍摄设备100和目标对象之间的距离在不断的改变，也需要重新计算对焦参数峰点值。When the photographing device moves, for example, when the photographing device 100 is rotated by a certain angle or translated by a distance, at this time, the plurality of focus regions 404 as shown in FIG. 4 may no longer overlap with the in-focus object 406, resulting in a focus parameter peak point value. No longer valid. At this point, the user may wish the camera to focus on a different target object, or the user may wish to change the composition of the image, but the camera still focuses on the same target object. For the former case, the same focus area can be used, but it may be necessary to calculate a new focus parameter peak point value. In the latter case, it may be necessary to select a different focus area corresponding to the target object and may need to calculate a new focus parameter peak point value. Sometimes, when the photographing apparatus 100 moves along the line between the photographing apparatus 100 and the target object, the plurality of focus areas 404 as shown in FIG. 4 may still overlap with the focus object 406, but the photographing apparatus 100 and the target object The distance between them is constantly changing, and the focus parameter peak value needs to be recalculated.

步骤S2802、如果所述拍摄设备移动，则停止显示所述第一指示标志和/或所述第二指示标志。 Step S2802, if the photographing device moves, stopping displaying the first indication mark and/or the second indication mark.

如果拍摄设备100发生了移动，可以停止显示所述第一指示标志，然后根据上述实施例步骤S301中的任一种方法计算出新的对焦参数峰点值之后，恢复显示第一指示标志。也就是说，所述第一指示标志可以暂时消失，直到计算出新的对焦参数峰点值为止。在一些实施例中，所述第二指示标志也可以暂时消失，直到计算出新的对焦参数峰点值为止。在所述第一指示标志和/或所述第二指示标志暂时消失的前后，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离可能会发生变化，是否变化取决于暂时消失的前后，新的对焦参数峰点值和之前的对焦参数峰点值是否一致。If the photographing apparatus 100 has moved, the display of the first indication mark may be stopped, and then the first indication mark is resumed after the new focus parameter peak point value is calculated according to any one of the methods of step S301 in the above embodiment. That is, the first indicator may temporarily disappear until a new focus parameter peak point value is calculated. In some embodiments, the second indicator may also temporarily disappear until a new focus parameter peak point value is calculated. Before and after the first indication mark and/or the second indication mark temporarily disappear, the indication distance between the first indication mark and the second indication mark may change, and whether the change depends on temporary disappearance Before and after, whether the new focus parameter peak point value and the previous focus parameter peak point value are consistent.

本实施例通过检测拍摄设备是否移动，当拍摄设备移动时，停止显示所述第一指示标志和/或所述第二指示标志，当重新选取对焦对象后，重新计算对焦参数峰点值，重新显示第一指示标志和/或第二指示标志，提高了对焦提示的灵活性。In this embodiment, by detecting whether the photographing device moves, when the photographing device moves, the display of the first indication mark and/or the second indication mark is stopped. When the focus object is re-selected, the focus parameter peak value is recalculated, and the focus value is re-calculated. Displaying the first indicator mark and/or the second indicator mark improves the flexibility of the focus prompt.

本发明实施例提供一种手动对焦的提示方法。图29为本发明另一实施例提供的手动对焦的提示方法的流程图。在本实施例中，对焦提示方式不仅限于如上实施例所述的在显示组件上显示第一指示标志和第二指示标志的方式，还可以包括其他几种提示方式，下面进行详细的介绍。Embodiments of the present invention provide a method for prompting manual focus. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of a method for prompting manual focus according to another embodiment of the present invention. In this embodiment, the focus prompting manner is not limited to the manner of displaying the first indicator mark and the second indicator mark on the display component as described in the above embodiment, and may also include other prompting manners, which are described in detail below.

如图29所示，在上述实施例的基础上，步骤S303根据所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值进行对焦提示，可以包括：As shown in FIG. 29, based on the foregoing embodiment, step S303 performs a focus prompt according to the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value, which may include:

步骤S2901、如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则控制拍摄设备上多个发光组件中的第一发光组件发光。Step S2901: If the current focus value is smaller than the focus parameter peak point value, controlling the first one of the plurality of light-emitting components on the photographing device to emit light.

在本实施例中，拍摄设备100还可设置有多个发光组件，例如，拍摄设备100设置有3个发光组件。所述发光组件包括LED。当所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值时，控制装置108或控制装置116控制多个发光组件中的第一发光组件发光，例如控制3个发光组件中左侧的发光组件发光。In the embodiment, the photographing apparatus 100 may also be provided with a plurality of light emitting components. For example, the photographing apparatus 100 is provided with three light emitting components. The lighting assembly includes an LED. When the current focus value is less than the focus parameter peak point value, the control device 108 or the control device 116 controls the first one of the plurality of light emitting components to emit light, for example, controls the light emitting component of the left side of the three light emitting components to emit light.

步骤S2902、如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则控制拍摄设备上多个发光组件中的第二发光组件发光。Step S2902: If the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, controlling the second one of the plurality of light emitting components on the photographing device to emit light.

当所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值时，控制装置108或控制装置116控制多个发光组件中的第二发光组件发光。例如控制3个发光组件中右侧的发光组件发光。When the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, the control device 108 or the control device 116 controls the second one of the plurality of light emitting components to emit light. For example, controlling 3 lighting groups The light-emitting component on the right side of the device emits light.

步骤S2903、如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则控制拍摄设备上多个发光组件中的第三发光组件发光。Step S2903, if the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, controlling the third one of the plurality of light emitting components on the photographing device to emit light.

当所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值时，控制装置108或控制装置116控制多个发光组件中的第三发光组件发光。例如控制3个发光组件中中间的发光组件发光。When the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, the control device 108 or the control device 116 controls the third one of the plurality of light emitting components to emit light. For example, the light-emitting component in the middle of the three light-emitting components is controlled to emit light.

或者，当所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值时，控制装置108或控制装置116控制3个发光组件中右侧的发光组件发光。当所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值时，控制装置108或控制装置116控制3个发光组件中左侧的发光组件发光。Alternatively, when the current focus value is smaller than the focus parameter peak point value, the control device 108 or the control device 116 controls the light-emitting component on the right side of the three light-emitting components to emit light. When the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, the control device 108 or the control device 116 controls the light-emitting components on the left side of the three light-emitting components to emit light.

可选的，所述第三发光组件位于所述多个发光组件的中间位置，所述第一发光组件和第二发光组件分别位于所述第三发光组件的两侧。Optionally, the third light emitting component is located at an intermediate position of the plurality of light emitting components, and the first light emitting component and the second light emitting component are respectively located at two sides of the third light emitting component.

在一些实施例中，拍摄设备100包括的发光组件的个数可以不止3个，还可以大于3个。例如，拍摄设备100包括发光组件A、发光组件B、发光组件C、发光组件D、发光组件E。当所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值时，控制装置108或控制装置116控制中间位置的发光组件C发光。当所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值时，控制装置108或控制装置116控制发光组件C左侧的发光组件A和发光组件B中的至少一个发光。当所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值时，控制装置108或控制装置116发光组件C右侧的发光组件D、发光组件E中的至少一个发光。或者，当所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值时，控制装置108或控制装置116控制发光组件C左侧的发光组件A和发光组件B中的至少一个发光。当所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值时，控制装置108或控制装置116发光组件C右侧的发光组件D、发光组件E中的至少一个发光。In some embodiments, the number of light-emitting components included in the photographing apparatus 100 may be more than three, and may be greater than three. For example, the photographing apparatus 100 includes a light emitting component A, a light emitting component B, a light emitting component C, a light emitting component D, and a light emitting component E. When the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, the control device 108 or the control device 116 controls the light-emitting component C at the intermediate position to emit light. When the current focus value is less than the focus parameter peak point value, the control device 108 or the control device 116 controls at least one of the light-emitting component A and the light-emitting component B on the left side of the light-emitting component C to emit light. When the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, the control device 108 or the control device 116 illuminates at least one of the light-emitting component D and the light-emitting component E on the right side of the light-emitting component C. Alternatively, when the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, the control device 108 or the control device 116 controls at least one of the light-emitting component A and the light-emitting component B on the left side of the light-emitting component C to emit light. When the current focus value is smaller than the focus parameter peak point value, the control device 108 or the control device 116 illuminates at least one of the light-emitting component D and the light-emitting component E on the right side of the light-emitting component C.

在另外一些实施例中，当所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值时，所述当前对焦值和所述对焦参数峰点值之间的差值的绝对值越大，所述第一发光组件和所述第三发光组件之间的距离越远；当所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值时，所述当前对焦值和所述对焦参数峰点值之间的差值的绝对值越大，所述第二发光组件和所述第三发光组件之间的距离越远。In some other embodiments, when the current focus value is smaller than the focus parameter peak point value, the absolute value of the difference between the current focus value and the focus parameter peak point value is larger, the first The further the distance between a light-emitting component and the third light-emitting component; the difference between the current focus value and the focus parameter peak-point value when the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak-point value The larger the absolute value of the value, the second light emitting component and the third light emitting component The further the distance between them.

例如，拍摄设备100包括的发光组件的个数还可以更多，当所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值时，控制装置108或控制装置116控制多个发光组件中中间位置的发光组件发光。当所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值时，所述当前对焦值和所述对焦参数峰点值之间的差值的绝对值越大，控制中间位置左侧、离中间位置越远的发光组件发光。当所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值时，所述当前对焦值和所述对焦参数峰点值之间的差值的绝对值越大，控制中间位置右侧、离中间位置越远的发光组件发光。即通过发光的发光组件相对于中间位置的位置关系例如左侧或右侧反映出所述当前对焦值和所述对焦参数峰点值之间的大小关系，通过发光的发光组件距离中间位置的远近反映出所述当前对焦值和所述对焦参数峰点值之间的差值。在其他实施例中，还可以通过发光的发光组件的个数反映出所述当前对焦值和所述对焦参数峰点值之间的差值，例如，当所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值时，所述当前对焦值和所述对焦参数峰点值之间的差值的绝对值越大，控制中间位置左侧越多的发光组件发光；当所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值时，所述当前对焦值和所述对焦参数峰点值之间的差值的绝对值越大，控制中间位置右侧越多的发光组件发光。For example, the number of the light-emitting components included in the photographing apparatus 100 may be more. When the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, the control device 108 or the control device 116 controls the illumination of the middle position of the plurality of light-emitting components. The component glows. When the current focus value is smaller than the focus parameter peak point value, the greater the absolute value of the difference between the current focus value and the focus parameter peak point value, the left side of the control intermediate position and the middle position The far illuminating component emits light. When the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, the greater the absolute value of the difference between the current focus value and the focus parameter peak point value, the right side of the control intermediate position and the middle position The far illuminating component emits light. That is, the positional relationship of the light-emitting component with respect to the intermediate position, for example, the left side or the right side reflects the magnitude relationship between the current focus value and the peak value of the focus parameter, and the distance from the intermediate position by the light-emitting component of the light-emitting component Reflecting a difference between the current focus value and the focus parameter peak point value. In other embodiments, the difference between the current focus value and the focus parameter peak point value may also be reflected by the number of the illuminated light-emitting components, for example, when the current focus value is smaller than the focus parameter. a peak value, the greater the absolute value of the difference between the current focus value and the focus parameter peak point value, the more the left side of the control intermediate position is illuminated; when the current focus value is greater than the When the peak value of the parameter is focused, the greater the absolute value of the difference between the current focus value and the peak value of the focus parameter, the more the light-emitting component that controls the right side of the intermediate position emits light.

另外，发光组件不仅限于LED，还可以是显示组件105或显示组件113上的发光区域。In addition, the light emitting component is not limited to the LED, but may be a light emitting region on the display component 105 or the display component 113.

在其他实施例中，步骤S103根据所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值进行对焦提示，可以包括：通过在显示组件上显示数值以标识所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值之间的差值。In other embodiments, step S103 performs a focus prompt according to the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value, which may include: identifying a focus parameter peak point value and the current focus by displaying a value on the display component. The difference between the values.

可选的，所述通过在显示组件上显示数值以标识所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值之间的差值，包括：如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则在显示组件上显示负数，所述负数的绝对值表示所述当前对焦值和所述对焦参数峰点值之间差值的绝对值；如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则在显示组件上显示正数，所述正数表示所述当前对焦值和所述对焦参数峰点值之间差值的绝对值；如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则在显示组件上显示0。 Optionally, the displaying a value on the display component to identify a difference between the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value comprises: if the current focus value is smaller than the focus parameter peak point value And displaying a negative number on the display component, the absolute value of the negative number representing an absolute value of a difference between the current focus value and the focus parameter peak point value; if the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point a value, a positive number is displayed on the display component, the positive number representing an absolute value of a difference between the current focus value and the focus parameter peak point value; if the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point The value displays 0 on the display component.

可选的，所述数值的绝对值用于表示对焦环需要转动的角度。Optionally, the absolute value of the value is used to indicate the angle at which the focus ring needs to be rotated.

在其他实施例中，步骤S103根据所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值进行对焦提示，可以包括：通过控制拍摄设备的发声组件发出音频信号以标识所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值之间的差值。In other embodiments, step S103 performs a focus prompt according to the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value, which may include: sending an audio signal by controlling a sounding component of the photographing device to identify the focus parameter peak point value and the The difference between the current focus values.

所述通过控制拍摄设备的发声组件发出音频信号以标识所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值之间的差值，包括：如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则控制拍摄设备的发声组件发出第一音频信号，可选的，所述第一音频信号包括负数，所述负数的绝对值表示所述当前对焦值和所述对焦参数峰点值之间差值的绝对值；如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则控制拍摄设备的发声组件发出第二音频信号，可选的，所述第二音频信号包括正数，所述正数表示所述当前对焦值和所述对焦参数峰点值之间差值的绝对值；如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则控制拍摄设备的发声组件发出第三音频信号或不发声，可选的，所述第三音频信号包括0。Transmitting, by the sounding component of the photographing device, an audio signal to identify a difference between the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value, including: if the current focus value is less than the focus parameter peak point value, Controlling the sounding component of the photographing device to emit a first audio signal. Optionally, the first audio signal includes a negative number, and the absolute value of the negative number represents a difference between the current focus value and the focus parameter peak point value. An absolute value; if the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, controlling the sounding component of the photographing device to emit a second audio signal, optionally, the second audio signal includes a positive number, the positive number Determining an absolute value of a difference between the current focus value and the focus parameter peak point value; if the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, controlling a sounding component of the photographing device to emit a third audio signal or No sound, optionally, the third audio signal includes zero.

可选的，当所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值时，所述当前对焦值和所述对焦参数峰点值的差值的绝对值越小，所述第一音频信号的音量和/或重复频率越大；当所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值时，所述当前对焦值和所述对焦参数峰点值的差值的绝对值越小，所述第二音频信号的音量和/或重复频率越大。Optionally, when the current focus value is smaller than the focus parameter peak point value, the smaller the absolute value of the difference between the current focus value and the focus parameter peak point value, the volume of the first audio signal And/or the repetition frequency is larger; when the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, the absolute value of the difference between the current focus value and the focus parameter peak point value is smaller, the second The louder and/or repeating frequency of the audio signal is greater.

可选的，所述负数的绝对值和/或所述正数表示对焦环需要转动的角度。Optionally, the absolute value of the negative number and/or the positive number represents an angle at which the focus ring needs to be rotated.

在其他实施例中，步骤S103根据所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值进行对焦提示，可以包括：通过控制拍摄设备的震动组件以标识所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值之间的差值。In other embodiments, step S103 performs a focus prompt according to the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value, and may include: identifying a focus parameter peak point value and the current focus by controlling a vibration component of the photographing device. The difference between the values.

可选的，所述通过控制拍摄设备的震动组件以标识所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值之间的差值，包括：如果所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值不等，则控制拍摄设备的震动组件震动；如果所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值相等，则控制拍摄设备的震动组件不震动。Optionally, the determining a difference between the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value by controlling a vibration component of the photographing device includes: if the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value If not, the vibration component of the photographing device is controlled to vibrate; if the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value are equal, the vibration component of the photographing device is controlled not to vibrate.

可选的，所述震动组件的震动频率与所述当前对焦值和所述对焦参数峰点值之间的差值相关；或/及所述震动组件的震动强度与所述当前对焦值和所述对焦参数峰点值之间的差值相关。Optionally, a vibration frequency of the vibration component is related to the current focus value and the focus parameter The difference between the peak point values is related; or/and the vibration intensity of the vibrating component is related to the difference between the current focus value and the focus parameter peak point value.

可选的，所述当前对焦值和所述对焦参数峰点值的差值的绝对值越小，所述震动组件的震动频率和/或震动强度越大。Optionally, the smaller the absolute value of the difference between the current focus value and the focus parameter peak point value, the greater the vibration frequency and/or the vibration intensity of the vibration component.

或者，所述当前对焦值和所述对焦参数峰点值的差值的绝对值越大，所述震动组件的震动频率和/或震动强度越大。Alternatively, the greater the absolute value of the difference between the current focus value and the focus parameter peak point value, the greater the vibration frequency and/or the vibration intensity of the vibration component.

本实施例通过发光组件发光、显示组件上显示数值、发声组件发出音频信号、震动组件震动等方式进行对焦提示，通过多种对焦提示方式，提高了对焦提示的灵活性。In this embodiment, the light-emitting component emits light, the display component displays a numerical value, the sounding component emits an audio signal, and the vibration component vibrates to perform a focus prompt, and the plurality of focus prompting manners improve the flexibility of the focus prompt.

本发明实施例提供一种控制装置。图30为本发明实施例提供的控制装置的结构图，如图30所示，控制装置300包括：存储器301和处理器302。控制装置300具体可以是上述实施例中的控制装置108或控制装置116，存储器301具体可以是上述实施例中的存储器1082或存储器1162，处理器302具体可以是上述实施例中的处理器1084或处理器1164。Embodiments of the present invention provide a control apparatus. FIG. 30 is a structural diagram of a control apparatus according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 30, the control apparatus 300 includes a memory 301 and a processor 302. The control device 300 may be specifically the control device 108 or the control device 116 in the above embodiment. The memory 301 may be the memory 1082 or the memory 1162 in the above embodiment. The processor 302 may specifically be the processor 1084 in the above embodiment or Processor 1164.

存储器301用于存储程序代码；处理器302调用所述程序代码，当程序代码被执行时，用于执行以下操作：计算当前图像中对焦对象在合焦时的对焦参数峰点值；计算对焦调节组件当前的调整位置对应的当前对焦值；根据所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值进行对焦提示，提示用户操作所述对焦调节组件，以使所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值一致。The memory 301 is configured to store program code; the processor 302 calls the program code, when the program code is executed, to perform the following operations: calculating a focus parameter peak value of the focus object in the current image when the focus is in focus; calculating focus adjustment a current focus value corresponding to the current adjustment position of the component; performing a focus prompt according to the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value, prompting the user to operate the focus adjustment component to make the focus parameter peak point value and the The current focus value is the same.

可选的，处理器302计算当前图像中对焦对象在合焦时的对焦参数峰点值时，具体用于：对所述当前图像进行图像分析，得到对焦评价函数；根据对焦评价函数计算当前图像中对焦对象在合焦时的对焦参数峰点值。Optionally, the processor 302 calculates a focus parameter peak value of the focus object in the current image when the focus is in focus, and is specifically configured to: perform image analysis on the current image to obtain a focus evaluation function; and calculate a current image according to the focus evaluation function. The focus parameter peak value of the focus object in focus when it is in focus.

可选的，处理器302对所述当前图像进行图像分析，得到对焦评价函数时，具体用于：在频域对所述当前图像进行图像分析，得到对焦评价函数。 Optionally, when the processor 302 performs image analysis on the current image to obtain a focus evaluation function, the method is specifically configured to perform image analysis on the current image in a frequency domain to obtain a focus evaluation function.

可选的，处理器302在频域对所述当前图像进行图像分析时，具体用于：基于离散小波变换对所述当前图像进行图像分析。Optionally, when performing image analysis on the current image in the frequency domain, the processor 302 is specifically configured to perform image analysis on the current image based on the discrete wavelet transform.

可选的，处理器302在频域对所述当前图像进行图像分析时，具体用于：基于离散余弦变换对所述当前图像进行图像分析。Optionally, when performing image analysis on the current image in the frequency domain, the processor 302 is specifically configured to perform image analysis on the current image based on a discrete cosine transform.

可选的，处理器302对所述当前图像进行图像分析，得到对焦评价函数时，具体用于：对所述当前图像进行图像分析，得到所述当前图像的信息熵，将所述信息熵作为对焦评价函数。Optionally, the processor 302 performs image analysis on the current image to obtain an in-focus evaluation function, and is specifically configured to: perform image analysis on the current image to obtain information entropy of the current image, and use the information entropy as Focus evaluation function.

可选的，处理器302对所述当前图像进行图像分析，得到对焦评价函数时，具体用于：对所述当前图像进行微分运算，得到所述当前图像的灰度差分值，将所述当前图像的灰度差分值作为对焦评价函数。Optionally, the processor 302 performs image analysis on the current image to obtain a focus evaluation function, and is specifically configured to: perform differential operation on the current image to obtain a grayscale difference value of the current image, and use the current The grayscale difference value of the image is used as a focus evaluation function.

可选的，处理器302还用于：接收对当前图像中对焦对象的选择指令。Optionally, the processor 302 is further configured to: receive a selection instruction for the focus object in the current image.

可选的，处理器302接收对当前图像中对焦对象的选择指令时，具体用于：接收对当前图像中对焦对象上的对焦点的选择指令。Optionally, when the processor 302 receives the selection instruction for the focus object in the current image, the processor 302 is specifically configured to: receive a selection instruction for a focus point on the focus object in the current image.

可选的，所述当前图像显示在触摸屏上；处理器302接收对当前图像中对焦对象的选择指令时，具体用于：检测对所述触摸屏上显示的对焦对象的触摸操作。Optionally, the current image is displayed on the touch screen; when the processor 302 receives the selection instruction for the focus object in the current image, the processor 302 is specifically configured to: detect a touch operation on the focus object displayed on the touch screen.

本发明实施例提供的控制装置的具体原理和实现方式均与图3所示实施例类似，此处不再赘述。The specific principles and implementations of the control device provided by the embodiment of the present invention are similar to the embodiment shown in FIG. 3, and details are not described herein again.

本发明实施例提供一种控制装置。在图30所示实施例提供的技术方案的基础上，可选的，处理器302根据所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值进行对焦提示时，具体用于：在显示组件上显示第一指示标志，所述第一指示标志用于指示所述对焦参数峰点值；在所述显示组件上显示第二指示标志，所述第二指示标志用于指示所述当前对焦值；其中，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离与所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值之间的差值相关。Embodiments of the present invention provide a control apparatus. On the basis of the technical solution provided by the embodiment shown in FIG. 30, optionally, when the processor 302 performs the focus prompt according to the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value, specifically, it is used to display on the display component. a first indicator, the first indicator is used to indicate the focus parameter peak point value; a second indicator is displayed on the display component, the second indicator is used to indicate the current focus value; The first An indication distance between the indication flag and the second indication mark is related to a difference between the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value.

可选的，处理器302在显示组件上显示第一指示标志时，具体用于：在显示组件的预设区域显示第一指示标志；相应的，处理器302在所述显示组件上显示第二指示标志时，具体用于：如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二指示标志显示在所述预设区域的第一侧；如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二指示标志显示在所述预设区域的第二侧，所述第二侧与所述第一侧相对；如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二指示标志显示在所述预设区域，所述第二指示标志和所述第一指示标志重叠。Optionally, when the processor 302 displays the first indicator on the display component, the method is specifically configured to display the first indicator in a preset area of the display component; correspondingly, the processor 302 displays the second component on the display component. When the indicator is used, specifically, if the current focus value is smaller than the focus parameter peak point value, displaying the second indicator flag on a first side of the preset area; if the current focus value is greater than The focus parameter peak point value is displayed on the second side of the preset area, the second side is opposite to the first side; if the current focus value is equal to the And focusing the parameter peak point value, the second indication mark is displayed on the preset area, and the second indicator mark and the first indicator mark overlap.

可选的，所述预设区域包括所述对焦对象。Optionally, the preset area includes the focus object.

可选的，所述预设区域包括目标指示框，所述目标指示框用于指示选择对焦的对象。Optionally, the preset area includes a target indication frame, and the target indication frame is used to indicate an object that selects focus.

可选的，处理器302在显示组件上显示第一指示标志时，具体用于：在显示组件上显示的刻度图像上显示所述第一指示标志；处理器302在所述显示组件上显示第二指示标志时，具体用于：在显示组件上显示的刻度图像上显示所述第二指示标志；其中，所述第一指示标志位于所述刻度图像上的固定位置，所述第二指示标志随着所述对焦调节组件的调整位置的变化，在所述刻度图像上移动。Optionally, when the processor 302 displays the first indicator on the display component, specifically, the processor displays the first indicator on the scale image displayed on the display component; the processor 302 displays the first indicator on the display component. The second indicator is used to: display the second indicator on the scale image displayed on the display component; wherein the first indicator is located at a fixed position on the scale image, and the second indicator Moving along the scale image as the adjusted position of the focus adjustment assembly changes.

可选的，处理器302在显示组件上显示的刻度图像上显示所述第一指示标志时，具体用于：在显示组件上显示的刻度图像的中间位置显示第一指示标志；相应的，处理器302在显示组件上显示的刻度图像上显示所述第二指示标志时，具体用于：如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二指示标志显示在所述刻度图像上所述中间位置的第一侧；如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二指示标志显示在所述刻度图像上所述中间位置的第二侧，所述第二侧与所述第一侧相对；如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二指示标志显示在所述中间位置。Optionally, when the processor 302 displays the first indicator on the scale image displayed on the display component, the processor 302 is configured to display the first indicator in an intermediate position of the scale image displayed on the display component; correspondingly, processing When the second indicator is displayed on the scale image displayed on the display component, the device 302 is configured to: if the current focus value is smaller than the focus parameter peak point value, display the second indicator flag in the Determining a first side of the intermediate position on the scale image; if the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, displaying the second indication mark on the second position of the intermediate position on the scale image a side, the second side is opposite to the first side; if the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, displaying the second indication mark at the intermediate position.

可选的，所述刻度图像包括刻度曲线。Optionally, the scale image comprises a scale curve.

可选的，所述刻度曲线呈半圆弧。 Optionally, the scale curve is a semi-circular arc.

可选的，所述刻度图像包括刻度直线。Optionally, the scale image comprises a scale line.

可选的，所述刻度图像的中间位置位于所述显示组件的预设区域，所述预设区域包括目标指示框，所述目标指示框用于指示选择对焦的对象。Optionally, an intermediate position of the scale image is located in a preset area of the display component, and the preset area includes a target indication frame, and the target indication frame is used to indicate an object that selects focus.

可选的，处理器302在显示组件上显示第一指示标志，所述第一指示标志用于指示所述对焦参数峰点值时，具体用于：在显示组件上显示第一边框，所述第一边框用于指示所述对焦参数峰点值；处理器302在所述显示组件上显示第二指示标志，所述第二指示标志用于指示所述当前对焦值时，具体用于：在所述显示组件上显示第二边框，所述第二边框用于指示所述当前对焦值；其中，所述第二边框的中心和所述第一边框的中心重叠。Optionally, the processor 302 displays a first indication flag on the display component, where the first indication flag is used to indicate the focus parameter peak point value, specifically: displaying a first frame on the display component, The first frame is used to indicate the focus parameter peak point value; the processor 302 displays a second indicator on the display component, and the second indicator is used to indicate the current focus value, specifically for: A second frame is displayed on the display component, and the second frame is used to indicate the current focus value; wherein a center of the second frame overlaps a center of the first frame.

可选的，处理器302在所述显示组件上显示第二边框时，具体用于：如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二边框显示在所述第一边框的里面；如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二边框显示在所述第一边框的外面；如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二边框显示覆盖在所述第一边框上。Optionally, when the processor 302 displays the second frame on the display component, specifically, if the current focus value is smaller than the focus parameter peak point value, displaying the second frame in the first The inside of a frame; if the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, displaying the second frame outside the first frame; if the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point a value, the second border display is overlaid on the first border.

可选的，处理器302在所述显示组件上显示第二边框时，具体用于：如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二边框显示在所述第一边框的里面；如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二边框显示在所述第一边框的外面；如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二边框显示覆盖在所述第一边框上。Optionally, when the processor 302 displays the second frame on the display component, specifically, if the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, displaying the second frame in the first The inside of a frame; if the current focus value is smaller than the focus parameter peak point value, displaying the second frame outside the first frame; if the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point a value, the second border display is overlaid on the first border.

可选的，所述第一边框为目标指示框，所述目标指示框用于指示选择对焦的对象。Optionally, the first frame is a target indication frame, and the target indication frame is used to indicate an object that selects focus.

可选的，在对焦完成的预设时间之后，所述第二边框消失。Optionally, the second border disappears after a preset time of focusing completion.

可选的，处理器302在显示组件上显示第一边框，所述第一边框用于指示所述对焦参数峰点值时，具体用于：在显示组件上显示第一环，所述第一环用于指示所述对焦参数峰点值；处理器302在所述显示组件上显示第二边框，所述第二边框用于指示所述当前对焦值时，具体用于：在显示组件上显示第二环，所述第二环用于指示所述当前对焦值；其中，所述第二环和所述第一环是同心圆。 Optionally, the processor 302 displays a first frame on the display component, where the first frame is used to indicate the focus parameter peak point value, specifically, the first ring is displayed on the display component, the first The ring is used to indicate the focus parameter peak point value; the processor 302 displays a second frame on the display component, and the second frame is used to indicate the current focus value, specifically for: displaying on the display component a second ring, the second ring is used to indicate the current focus value; wherein the second ring and the first ring are concentric circles.

可选的，处理器302在显示组件上显示第二环时，具体用于：如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二环显示在所述第一环的里面；如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二环显示在所述第一环的外面；如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二环显示覆盖在所述第一环上。Optionally, when the processor 302 displays the second ring on the display component, the method is specifically configured to display the second ring in the first ring if the current focus value is less than the focus parameter peak point value. If the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, displaying the second ring outside the first ring; if the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, The second ring display is then overlaid on the first ring.

可选的，处理器302在显示组件上显示第二环时，具体用于：如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二环显示在所述第一环的里面；如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二环显示在所述第一环的外面；如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二环显示覆盖在所述第一环上。Optionally, when the processor 302 displays the second ring on the display component, the method is specifically configured to display the second ring in the first ring if the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value. If the current focus value is smaller than the focus parameter peak point value, displaying the second ring outside the first ring; if the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, The second ring display is then overlaid on the first ring.

可选的，所述第一环为目标指示框，所述目标指示框用于指示选择对焦的对象。Optionally, the first ring is a target indication frame, and the target indication frame is used to indicate an object that selects focus.

可选的，在对焦完成的预设时间之后，所述第二环消失。Optionally, the second ring disappears after a preset time of focusing completion.

可选的，处理器302在显示组件上显示第一指示标志，所述第一指示标志用于指示所述对焦参数峰点值时，具体用于：在显示组件上显示一线段，所述线段用于指示所述对焦参数峰点值；处理器302在所述显示组件上显示第二指示标志，所述第二指示标志用于指示所述当前对焦值时，具体用于：在显示组件上显示一半圆，所述半圆用于指示所述当前对焦值；其中，所述线段的中心和所述半圆的圆心重叠，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离包括所述半圆底部的直径与所述线段之间的夹角。Optionally, the processor 302 displays a first indication flag on the display component, where the first indication flag is used to indicate the focus parameter peak point value, specifically: displaying a line segment on the display component, the line segment For indicating the focus parameter peak point value; the processor 302 displays a second indicator on the display component, where the second indicator is used to indicate the current focus value, specifically for: on the display component Displaying a half circle for indicating the current focus value; wherein a center of the line segment overlaps a center of the semicircle, and an indication distance between the first indicator mark and the second indicator mark includes The diameter of the bottom of the semicircle and the angle between the line segments.

可选的，如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则所述半圆底部的直径与所述线段之间的夹角是所述半圆以其圆心为旋转中心逆时针旋转形成的；如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则所述半圆底部的直径与所述线段之间的夹角是所述半圆以其圆心为旋转中心顺时针旋转形成的；如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则所述半圆底部的直径与所述线段重叠。Optionally, if the current focus value is smaller than the focus parameter peak point value, an angle between the diameter of the semicircle bottom and the line segment is formed by the counterclockwise rotation of the semicircle with its center of rotation as a center of rotation. If the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, the angle between the diameter of the semicircle bottom and the line segment is formed by the clockwise rotation of the semicircle with its center of rotation as a center of rotation; Said that the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, then The diameter of the bottom of the semicircle overlaps the line segment.

可选的，如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则所述半圆底部的直径与所述线段之间的夹角是所述半圆以其圆心为旋转中心逆时针旋转形成的；如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则所述半圆底部的直径与所述线段之间的夹角是所述半圆以其圆心为旋转中心顺时针旋转形成的；如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则所述半圆底部的直径与所述线段重叠。Optionally, if the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, an angle between the diameter of the semicircle bottom and the line segment is formed by the counterclockwise rotation of the semicircle with its center of rotation as a center of rotation. If the current focus value is smaller than the focus parameter peak point value, the angle between the diameter of the semicircle bottom and the line segment is formed by the clockwise rotation of the semicircle with its center of rotation as a center of rotation; If the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, the diameter of the semicircle bottom overlaps with the line segment.

可选的，所述线段和所述半圆位于目标指示环内，所述目标指示环用于指示选择对焦的对象。Optionally, the line segment and the semicircle are located in a target indicating ring, and the target indicating ring is used to indicate an object that selects focus.

可选的，所述目标指示环的半径大于或等于所述半圆的半径。Optionally, the target indicating ring has a radius greater than or equal to a radius of the semicircle.

可选的，处理器302在显示组件上显示第一指示标志，所述第一指示标志用于指示所述对焦参数峰点值时，具体用于：在显示组件上显示第一线段，所述第一线段用于指示所述对焦参数峰点值；处理器302在所述显示组件上显示第二指示标志，所述第二指示标志用于指示所述当前对焦值时，具体用于：在显示组件上显示第二线段，所述第二线段用于指示所述当前对焦值；其中，所述第一线段的中心和所述第二线段的中心重叠，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离包括所述第一线段和所述第二线段之间的夹角。Optionally, the processor 302 displays a first indication flag on the display component, where the first indication flag is used to indicate the focus parameter peak point value, specifically, the first line segment is displayed on the display component. The first line segment is used to indicate the focus parameter peak point value; the processor 302 displays a second indicator flag on the display component, where the second indicator flag is used to indicate the current focus value, specifically for Displaying a second line segment on the display component, the second line segment is for indicating the current focus value; wherein a center of the first line segment and a center of the second line segment overlap, the first indicator mark The indicated distance between the second indicator and the second indicator includes an included angle between the first line segment and the second line segment.

可选的，如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则所述第一线段和所述第二线段之间的夹角是所述第二线段以其中心为旋转中心逆时针旋转形成的；如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则所述第一线段和所述第二线段之间的夹角是所述第二线段以其中心为旋转中心顺时针旋转形成的；如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则所述第一线段和所述第二线段重叠。Optionally, if the current focus value is smaller than the focus parameter peak point value, an angle between the first line segment and the second line segment is that the second line segment is reversed with its center as a rotation center Formed by the hour hand rotation; if the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, the angle between the first line segment and the second line segment is the second line segment with its center as the center of rotation Formed by clockwise rotation; if the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, the first line segment and the second line segment overlap.

可选的，如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则所述第一线段和所述第二线段之间的夹角是所述第二线段以其中心为旋转中心逆时针旋转形成的；如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则所述第一线段和所述第二线段之间的夹角是所述第二线段以其中心为旋转中心顺时针旋转形成的；如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则所述第一线段和所述第二线段重叠。Optionally, if the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, an angle between the first line segment and the second line segment is that the second line segment is reversed with its center as a rotation center Formed by hour hand rotation; if the current focus value is less than the focus parameter peak point value, an angle between the first line segment and the second line segment is that the second line segment is rotated in its center The heart is formed by clockwise rotation; if the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, the first line segment and the second line segment overlap.

本发明实施例提供的控制装置的具体原理和实现方式均与图5-图25所示实施例类似，此处不再赘述。The specific principles and implementation manners of the control device provided by the embodiment of the present invention are similar to the embodiment shown in FIG. 5 to FIG. 25, and details are not described herein again.

本实施例提供了多种形式的对焦提示图标，以提示用户当前图像是否合焦，以及如何调整对焦调节组件以使当前图像合焦，不仅可以使用户在手动对焦时，快速准确的找到对焦对象合焦时的对焦位置，同时还增加了对焦提示图标显示的灵活性。The embodiment provides various forms of focus prompt icons to prompt the user whether the current image is in focus, and how to adjust the focus adjustment component to focus the current image, which not only enables the user to quickly and accurately find the focus object when manually focusing. The focus position when focusing is also increased the flexibility of the focus indicator icon display.

本发明实施例提供一种控制装置。在图30所示实施例提供的技术方案的基础上，可选的，所述显示组件包括屏幕；处理器302还用于：将所述当前图像显示在所述屏幕上，其中，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志覆盖在所述当前图像上。Embodiments of the present invention provide a control apparatus. On the basis of the technical solution provided by the embodiment shown in FIG. 30, optionally, the display component includes a screen; the processor 302 is further configured to: display the current image on the screen, where the An indicator and the second indicator are overlaid on the current image.

可选的，处理器302还用于：在所述显示组件上显示用于提示对焦对象的目标指示框。Optionally, the processor 302 is further configured to: display, on the display component, a target indication frame for prompting the focused object.

可选的，所述目标指示框包括目标提示环。Optionally, the target indication box includes a target prompt ring.

可选的，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志中的至少一个显示在所述目标指示框之外、距离所述目标指示框在预设距离范围内的位置。Optionally, at least one of the first indication mark and the second indication mark is displayed at a position outside the target indication frame and within a preset distance range from the target indication frame.

可选的，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志中的至少一个显示在所述目标指示框之内。Optionally, at least one of the first indicator flag and the second indicator flag is displayed within the target indication frame.

可选的，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志中的至少一个显示在所述目标指示框上。Optionally, at least one of the first indicator flag and the second indicator flag is displayed on the target indication frame.

可选的，在对焦完成的预设时间之后，所述目标指示框消失。Optionally, the target indication frame disappears after a preset time of focusing completion.

本发明实施例提供的控制装置的具体原理和实现方式均与图26所示实施例类似，此处不再赘述。The specific principle and implementation manner of the control device provided by the embodiment of the present invention are both shown in FIG. The embodiments are similar and will not be described here.

本发明实施例提供一种控制装置。在图30所示实施例提供的技术方案的基础上，可选的，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离与所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值之间的差值成比例。Embodiments of the present invention provide a control apparatus. On the basis of the technical solution provided by the embodiment shown in FIG. 30, optionally, the indication distance between the first indication mark and the second indication mark and the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus The difference between the values is proportional.

可选的，处理器302还用于：根据所述对焦调节组件的调整位置的变化，更新所述当前对焦值。Optionally, the processor 302 is further configured to: update the current focus value according to a change in an adjustment position of the focus adjustment component.

可选的，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离随着所述对焦调节组件的调整位置的变化而均匀变化。Optionally, the indication distance between the first indication mark and the second indication mark changes uniformly with the change of the adjustment position of the focus adjustment component.

可选的，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离随着所述对焦调节组件的调整位置的变化而非均匀变化。Optionally, the indication distance between the first indication mark and the second indication mark does not change uniformly with the change of the adjustment position of the focus adjustment component.

可选的，处理器302根据所述对焦调节组件的调整位置的变化，更新所述当前对焦值时，具体用于：根据对焦环的转动角度，更新所述当前对焦值。Optionally, the processor 302 is configured to update the current focus value according to a rotation angle of the focus ring when the current focus value is updated according to the change of the adjustment position of the focus adjustment component.

可选的，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离随着对焦环的转动角度均匀变化。Optionally, the indication distance between the first indication mark and the second indication mark changes uniformly with the rotation angle of the focus ring.

可选的，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离随着对焦环的转动角度非均匀变化。Optionally, the indication distance between the first indicator mark and the second indicator mark varies non-uniformly with the rotation angle of the focus ring.

可选的，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离的变化率随着所述指示距离的减小而增大。Optionally, a rate of change of the indicated distance between the first indicator mark and the second indicator mark increases as the indicated distance decreases.

可选的，当所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离在不同预设范围内时，所述指示距离的变化率不同，所述预设范围和所述指示距离的变化率一一对应。Optionally, when the indication distance between the first indication mark and the second indication mark is within a different preset range, the change rate of the indication distance is different, the preset range and the indication distance The rate of change corresponds one-to-one.

可选的，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离的变化率包括所述对焦环转动单位角度时所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离的变化量。Optionally, a rate of change of the indicated distance between the first indicator and the second indicator includes a relationship between the first indicator and the second indicator when the focus ring is rotated by a unit angle Indicates the amount of change in distance.

可选的，对焦距离随着所述对焦调节组件的调整位置的变化而均匀变化。Optionally, the focus distance is uniformly changed as the adjustment position of the focus adjustment component changes. Chemical.

可选的，对焦距离随着所述对焦调节组件的调整位置的变化而非均匀变化。Optionally, the focus distance varies uniformly with the adjusted position of the focus adjustment component.

可选的，所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值之间的差值越小，相同的调整位置的变化量引起的对焦距离的变化量越小。Optionally, the smaller the difference between the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value is, the smaller the amount of change in the focus distance caused by the change amount of the same adjustment position is.

可选的，对焦距离随着对焦环的转动角度均匀变化。Optionally, the focus distance changes uniformly with the angle of rotation of the focus ring.

可选的，对焦距离随着对焦环的转动角度非均匀变化。Optionally, the focus distance varies non-uniformly with the angle of rotation of the focus ring.

可选的，所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值之间的差值越小，相同的转动角度引起的对焦距离的变化量越小。Optionally, the smaller the difference between the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value is, the smaller the amount of change in the focus distance caused by the same rotation angle is.

本发明实施例提供的控制装置的具体原理和实现方式均与图27所示实施例类似，此处不再赘述。The specific principles and implementations of the control device provided by the embodiment of the present invention are similar to the embodiment shown in FIG. 27, and details are not described herein again.

本实施例通过第一指示标志和第二指示标志之间的指示距离随着对焦调节组件的调整量非均匀变化，例如当第二指示标志越接近于第一指示标志时，对焦调节组件相同的调整量引起的指示距离的变化量越大，可提高对焦指示的显示灵敏度，也就是说，当第二指示标志即将接近于第一指示标志时，用户对焦调节组件轻微的调整，例如将对焦环转动相对较小的角度，将导致显示组件上显示的指示距离出现相对较大的变化，从而使得用户可以清楚的观测到对焦位置的变化，提高了手动对焦的精确度。通过对焦距离随着所述对焦调节组件的调整位置的变化而非均匀变化，例如当第二指示标志越接近于第一指示标志时，对焦调节组件相同的调整量引起的对焦距离的变化量越小，可提高手动对焦的操作灵敏度，也就是说，当第二指示标志即将接近于第一指示标志时，为了使对焦距离发生相同的变化，用户需要增加对焦调节组件的调整量，从而使得用户可以更精细地调整对焦距离，提高了手动对焦的精确度。In this embodiment, the indication distance between the first indication mark and the second indication mark varies non-uniformly with the adjustment amount of the focus adjustment component, for example, when the second indication mark is closer to the first indication mark, the focus adjustment component is the same. The greater the amount of change in the indication distance caused by the adjustment amount, the display sensitivity of the focus indication can be improved, that is, when the second indication mark is about to approach the first indication mark, the user focus adjustment component is slightly adjusted, for example, the focus ring Rotating a relatively small angle will result in a relatively large change in the indicated distance displayed on the display assembly, so that the user can clearly observe the change in the focus position and improve the accuracy of the manual focus. The amount of change in the focus distance caused by the same adjustment amount of the focus adjustment component is changed by the focus distance as the adjustment position of the focus adjustment component changes rather than uniformly, for example, when the second indication flag is closer to the first indication mark Small, can improve the operational sensitivity of manual focus, that is, when the second indication mark is about to approach the first indication mark, in order to make the same change of the focus distance, the user needs to increase the adjustment amount of the focus adjustment component, thereby making the user The focus distance can be adjusted more finely, improving the accuracy of manual focus.

本发明实施例提供一种控制装置。在图30所示实施例提供的技术方案的基础上，可选的，处理器302还用于：检测拍摄设备是否发生移动；如果所述拍摄设备移动，则停止显示所述第一指示标志和/或所述第二指示标志。Embodiments of the present invention provide a control apparatus. On the basis of the technical solution provided by the embodiment shown in FIG. 30, optionally, the processor 302 is further configured to: detect whether the shooting device moves; if the shooting device moves, stop displaying the first indicator and / or the second indicator.

可选的，处理器302检测拍摄设备是否发生移动时，具体用于：采用所述拍摄设备设置的运动传感器，检测拍摄设备是否发生移动。Optionally, when the processor 302 detects whether the shooting device moves, the processor is specifically configured to: adopt The motion sensor provided by the photographing device detects whether the photographing device moves.

可选的，所述运动传感器包括如下至少一种：陀螺仪、加速度计、惯性测量单元。Optionally, the motion sensor comprises at least one of the following: a gyroscope, an accelerometer, and an inertial measurement unit.

可选的，处理器302检测拍摄设备是否发生移动时，具体用于：检测当前图像相对于显示组件是否发生移动。Optionally, when the processor 302 detects whether the shooting device is moving, the processor 302 is specifically configured to: detect whether the current image moves relative to the display component.

本发明实施例提供的控制装置的具体原理和实现方式均与图28所示实施例类似，此处不再赘述。The specific principles and implementations of the control device provided by the embodiment of the present invention are similar to the embodiment shown in FIG. 28, and details are not described herein again.

本发明实施例提供一种控制装置。在图30所示实施例提供的技术方案的基础上，可选的，处理器302根据所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值进行对焦提示时，具体用于：如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则控制拍摄设备上多个发光组件中的第一发光组件发光；如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则控制拍摄设备上多个发光组件中的第二发光组件发光；如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则控制拍摄设备上多个发光组件中的第三发光组件发光。Embodiments of the present invention provide a control apparatus. On the basis of the technical solution provided by the embodiment shown in FIG. 30, optionally, when the processor 302 performs a focus prompt according to the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value, specifically: if the current focus is If the value is smaller than the focus parameter peak point value, controlling the first one of the plurality of light emitting components on the photographing device to emit light; if the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, controlling the plurality of light emitting on the photographing device The second illumination component of the component emits light; if the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, controlling the third one of the plurality of illumination components on the photographing device to emit light.

可选的，当所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值时，所述当前对焦值和所述对焦参数峰点值之间的差值的绝对值越大，所述第一发光组件和所述第三发光组件之间的距离越远；当所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值时，所述当前对焦值和所述对焦参数峰点值之间的差值的绝对值越大，所述第二发光组件和所述第三发光组件之间的距离越远。Optionally, when the current focus value is smaller than the focus parameter peak point value, the greater the absolute value of the difference between the current focus value and the focus parameter peak point value, the first illumination component The further the distance between the current focus value and the focus parameter peak value is greater when the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value The greater the value, the further the distance between the second illumination component and the third illumination component.

可选的，所述发光组件包括LED。Optionally, the light emitting component comprises an LED.

可选的，处理器302根据所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值进行对焦提示时，具体用于：通过在显示组件上显示数值以标识所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值之间的差值。 Optionally, when the processor 302 performs a focus prompt according to the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value, specifically, the method is: displaying a value on the display component to identify the focus parameter peak point value and the current The difference between the focus values.

可选的，处理器302通过在显示组件上显示数值以标识所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值之间的差值时，具体用于：如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则在显示组件上显示负数，所述负数的绝对值表示所述当前对焦值和所述对焦参数峰点值之间差值的绝对值；如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则在显示组件上显示正数，所述正数表示所述当前对焦值和所述对焦参数峰点值之间差值的绝对值；如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则在显示组件上显示0。Optionally, when the processor 302 displays a value on the display component to identify a difference between the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value, specifically, if the current focus value is smaller than the focus a parameter peak point value, wherein a negative number is displayed on the display component, the absolute value of the negative number representing an absolute value of a difference between the current focus value and the focus parameter peak point value; if the current focus value is greater than the a focus parameter peak point value, a positive number is displayed on the display component, the positive number representing an absolute value of a difference between the current focus value and the focus parameter peak point value; if the current focus value is equal to the The focus parameter peak value is displayed as 0 on the display component.

可选的，处理器302根据所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值进行对焦提示时，具体用于：通过控制拍摄设备的发声组件发出音频信号以标识所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值之间的差值。Optionally, when the processor 302 performs a focus prompt according to the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value, specifically: sending an audio signal by controlling a sounding component of the photographing device to identify the focus parameter peak point value and The difference between the current focus values.

可选的，处理器302通过控制拍摄设备的发声组件发出音频信号以标识所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值之间的差值时，具体用于：如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则控制拍摄设备的发声组件发出第一音频信号；如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则控制拍摄设备的发声组件发出第二音频信号；如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则控制拍摄设备的发声组件发出第三音频信号或不发声。Optionally, when the processor 302 sends an audio signal by the sounding component of the photographing device to identify a difference between the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value, specifically, if the current focus value is less than The focus parameter peak point value controls the sounding component of the photographing device to emit a first audio signal; if the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, controlling the sounding component of the photographing device to emit a second audio signal; The current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, and then the sounding component of the photographing device is controlled to emit a third audio signal or no sound.

可选的，所述第一音频信号包括负数，所述负数的绝对值表示所述当前对焦值和所述对焦参数峰点值之间差值的绝对值；所述第二音频信号包括正数，所述正数表示所述当前对焦值和所述对焦参数峰点值之间差值的绝对值；所述第三音频信号包括0。Optionally, the first audio signal includes a negative number, and an absolute value of the negative number represents an absolute value of a difference between the current focus value and the focus parameter peak point value; the second audio signal includes a positive number The positive number represents an absolute value of a difference between the current focus value and the focus parameter peak point value; the third audio signal includes zero.

可选的，所述负数的绝对值和/或所述正数表示所述对焦环需要转动的角度。Optionally, the absolute value of the negative number and/or the positive number represents an angle at which the focus ring needs to be rotated.

可选的，处理器302根据所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值进行对焦提示时，具体用于：通过控制拍摄设备的震动组件以标识所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值之间的差值。Optionally, when the processor 302 performs a focus prompt according to the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value, specifically, the method is: determining the focus parameter by controlling a vibration component of the photographing device. The difference between the peak value and the current focus value.

可选的，处理器302通过控制拍摄设备的震动组件以标识所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值之间的差值时，具体用于：如果所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值不等，则控制拍摄设备的震动组件震动；如果所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值相等，则控制拍摄设备的震动组件不震动。Optionally, when the processor 302 controls the vibration component of the photographing device to identify the difference between the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value, specifically, if: the focus parameter peak point value and the If the current focus value is not equal, the vibration component of the photographing device is controlled to vibrate; if the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value are equal, the vibration component of the photographing device is controlled not to vibrate.

可选的，所述震动组件的震动频率与所述当前对焦值和所述对焦参数峰点值之间的差值相关；或/及所述震动组件的震动强度与所述当前对焦值和所述对焦参数峰点值之间的差值相关。Optionally, a vibration frequency of the vibration component is related to a difference between the current focus value and the focus parameter peak point value; or/and a vibration intensity of the vibration component and the current focus value and The difference between the peak value of the focus parameter is related.

可选的，所述当前对焦值和所述对焦参数峰点值的差值的绝对值越大，所述震动组件的震动频率和/或震动强度越大。Optionally, the greater the absolute value of the difference between the current focus value and the focus parameter peak point value, the greater the vibration frequency and/or the vibration intensity of the vibration component.

本发明实施例提供的控制装置的具体原理和实现方式均与图29所示实施例类似，此处不再赘述。The specific principles and implementations of the control device provided by the embodiment of the present invention are similar to the embodiment shown in FIG. 29, and details are not described herein again.

本发明实施例提供一种拍摄设备。如图1所示，拍摄设备100包括机身104；光学组件102，安装在所述机身，用于采集图像信息；对焦调节组件106，与光学组件102连接，用于调节所述光学组件的焦距；以及控制装置108，控制装置108的具体原理和实现方式均与图30所述的控制装置300一致，此处不再赘述。Embodiments of the present invention provide a photographing apparatus. As shown in FIG. 1, the photographing apparatus 100 includes a body 104; an optical component 102 mounted on the body for acquiring image information; and a focus adjustment component 106 coupled to the optical component 102 for adjusting the optical component The specific principles and implementations of the control device 108 and the control device 108 are the same as those of the control device 300 illustrated in FIG. 30, and are not described herein again.

本发明实施例提供一种拍摄***。拍摄***具体可以是如图2所示的远程控制器110，远程控制器110包括：机身；天线112，安装在所述机身，用于与拍摄设备进行通讯；对焦调节组件114，安装在所述机身，用于调节所述拍摄设备的光学组件的焦距；以及控制装置116。控制装置116的具体原理和实现方式均与图30所述的控制装置300一致，此处不再赘述。Embodiments of the present invention provide a photographing system. The photographing system may specifically be a remote controller 110 as shown in FIG. 2, the remote controller 110 includes: a body; an antenna 112 installed in the body for communicating with a photographing device; and a focus adjustment component 114 installed in the The body for adjusting a focal length of an optical component of the photographing device; and a control device 116. The specific principle and implementation manner of the control device 116 are the same as those of the control device 300 described in FIG. Said.

在本发明所提供的几个实施例中，应该理解到，所揭露的装置和方法，可以通过其它的方式实现。例如，以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的，例如，所述单元的划分，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式，例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个***，或一些特征可以忽略，或不执行。另一点，所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口，装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接，可以是电性，机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided by the present invention, it should be understood that the disclosed apparatus and method may be implemented in other manners. For example, the device embodiments described above are merely illustrative. For example, the division of the unit is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be another division manner, for example, multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not executed. In addition, the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be an indirect coupling or communication connection through some interface, device or unit, and may be in an electrical, mechanical or other form.

所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的，作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元，即可以位于一个地方，或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of the embodiment.

另外，在本发明各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中，也可以是各个单元单独物理存在，也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。上述集成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现，也可以采用硬件加软件功能单元的形式实现。In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present invention may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically separately, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit. The above integrated unit can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of hardware plus software functional units.

上述以软件功能单元的形式实现的集成的单元，可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。上述软件功能单元存储在一个存储介质中，包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机，服务器，或者网络设备等)或处理器(processor)执行本发明各个实施例所述方法的部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括：U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(Read-Only Memory，ROM)、随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory，RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。The above-described integrated unit implemented in the form of a software functional unit can be stored in a computer readable storage medium. The above software functional unit is stored in a storage medium and includes instructions for causing a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) or a processor to perform the methods of the various embodiments of the present invention. Part of the steps. The foregoing storage medium includes: a U disk, a mobile hard disk, a read-only memory (ROM), a random access memory (RAM), a magnetic disk, or an optical disk, and the like, which can store program codes. .

本领域技术人员可以清楚地了解到，为描述的方便和简洁，仅以上述各功能模块的划分进行举例说明，实际应用中，可以根据需要而将上述功能分配由不同的功能模块完成，即将装置的内部结构划分成不同的功能模块，以完成以上描述的全部或者部分功能。上述描述的装置的具体工作过程，可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程，在此不再赘述。A person skilled in the art can clearly understand that for the convenience and brevity of the description, only the division of each functional module described above is exemplified. In practical applications, the above function assignment can be completed by different functional modules as needed, that is, the device is installed. The internal structure is divided into different functional modules to perform all or part of the functions described above. For the specific working process of the device described above, refer to the corresponding process in the foregoing method embodiment, and details are not described herein again.

最后应说明的是：以上各实施例仅用以说明本发明的技术方案，而非对其限制；尽管参照前述各实施例对本发明进行了详细的说明，本领域的普通技术人员应当理解：其依然可以对前述各实施例所记载的技术方案进行修改，或者对其中部分或者全部技术特征进行等同替换；而这些修改或者替换，并不使相应技术方案的本质脱离本发明各实施例技术方案的范围。 Finally, it should be noted that the above embodiments are only used to illustrate the technical solution of the present invention, and The invention is not limited thereto; although the invention has been described in detail with reference to the foregoing embodiments, those skilled in the art should understand that they can still modify the technical solutions described in the foregoing embodiments, or some or all of them. The technical features are equivalently substituted; and the modifications or substitutions do not depart from the scope of the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present invention.

Claims

一种手动对焦的提示方法，其特征在于，包括：A method for prompting manual focus, characterized in that it comprises:

计算当前图像中对焦对象在合焦时的对焦参数峰点值；Calculating a focus parameter peak value of the focus object in the current image when the focus is in focus;

计算对焦调节组件当前的调整位置对应的当前对焦值；Calculating a current focus value corresponding to a current adjustment position of the focus adjustment component;

根据所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值进行对焦提示，提示用户操作所述对焦调节组件，以使所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值一致。And performing a focus prompt according to the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value, prompting the user to operate the focus adjustment component to make the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value coincide.
根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述对焦调节组件包括如下至少一种：The method of claim 1 wherein said focus adjustment component comprises at least one of:

对焦环、调节按钮、调整轮。Focus ring, adjustment button, adjustment wheel.
根据权利要求1或2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述根据所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值进行对焦提示，包括：The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the performing the focus prompt according to the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value comprises:

在显示组件上显示第一指示标志，所述第一指示标志用于指示所述对焦参数峰点值；Displaying a first indicator on the display component, the first indicator is used to indicate the focus parameter peak point value;

在所述显示组件上显示第二指示标志，所述第二指示标志用于指示所述当前对焦值；Displaying a second indicator on the display component, the second indicator is used to indicate the current focus value;

其中，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离与所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值之间的差值相关。The indication distance between the first indication mark and the second indication mark is related to a difference between the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value.
根据权利要求3所述的方法，其特征在于，所述在显示组件上显示第一指示标志，包括：The method of claim 3, wherein the displaying the first indicator on the display component comprises:

在显示组件的预设区域显示第一指示标志；Displaying a first indicator mark in a preset area of the display component;

相应的，所述在所述显示组件上显示第二指示标志，包括：Correspondingly, the displaying the second indicator on the display component comprises:

如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二指示标志显示在所述预设区域的第一侧；If the current focus value is less than the focus parameter peak point value, displaying the second indicator mark on a first side of the preset area;

如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二指示标志显示在所述预设区域的第二侧，所述第二侧与所述第一侧相对；If the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, displaying the second indicator mark on a second side of the preset area, the second side being opposite to the first side;

如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二指示标志显示在所述预设区域，所述第二指示标志和所述第一指示标志重叠。And if the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, displaying the second indication mark in the preset area, where the second indication mark and the first indication mark overlap.
根据权利要求4所述的方法，其特征在于，所述预设区域包括所述对焦对象。 The method of claim 4 wherein said predetermined area comprises said in-focus object.
根据权利要求4或5所述的方法，其特征在于，所述预设区域包括目标指示框，所述目标指示框用于指示选择对焦的对象。The method according to claim 4 or 5, wherein the preset area comprises a target indication frame for indicating an object to be in focus.
根据权利要求3所述的方法，其特征在于，所述在显示组件上显示第一指示标志，包括：The method of claim 3, wherein the displaying the first indicator on the display component comprises:

在显示组件上显示的刻度图像上显示所述第一指示标志；Displaying the first indicator on a scale image displayed on the display component;

所述在所述显示组件上显示第二指示标志，包括：Displaying the second indicator on the display component, including:

在显示组件上显示的刻度图像上显示所述第二指示标志；Displaying the second indicator mark on the scale image displayed on the display component;

其中，所述第一指示标志位于所述刻度图像上的固定位置，所述第二指示标志随着所述对焦调节组件的调整位置的变化，在所述刻度图像上移动。The first indicator is located at a fixed position on the scale image, and the second indicator moves on the scale image as the adjustment position of the focus adjustment component changes.
根据权利要求7所述的方法，其特征在于，所述在显示组件上显示的刻度图像上显示所述第一指示标志，包括：The method according to claim 7, wherein the displaying the first indicator on the scale image displayed on the display component comprises:

在显示组件上显示的刻度图像的中间位置显示第一指示标志；Displaying a first indicator mark at an intermediate position of the scale image displayed on the display component;

相应的，所述在显示组件上显示的刻度图像上显示所述第二指示标志，包括：Correspondingly, the displaying the second indicator on the scale image displayed on the display component comprises:

如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二指示标志显示在所述刻度图像上所述中间位置的第一侧；If the current focus value is less than the focus parameter peak point value, displaying the second indicator mark on a first side of the intermediate position on the scale image;

如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二指示标志显示在所述刻度图像上所述中间位置的第二侧，所述第二侧与所述第一侧相对；If the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, displaying the second indicator mark on a second side of the intermediate position on the scale image, the second side and the first side relatively;

如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二指示标志显示在所述中间位置。If the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, the second indicator flag is displayed at the intermediate position.
根据权利要求7或8所述的方法，其特征在于，所述刻度图像包括刻度曲线。A method according to claim 7 or 8, wherein the scale image comprises a scale curve.
根据权利要求9所述的方法，其特征在于，所述刻度曲线呈半圆弧。The method of claim 9 wherein said scale curve is a semi-circular arc.
根据权利要求7或8所述的方法，其特征在于，所述刻度图像包括刻度直线。The method according to claim 7 or 8, wherein the scale image comprises a scale line.
根据权利要求8所述的方法，其特征在于，所述刻度图像的中间位置位于所述显示组件的预设区域，所述预设区域包括目标指示框，所述目标指示框用于指示选择对焦的对象。The method according to claim 8, wherein an intermediate position of the scale image is located in a preset area of the display component, the preset area includes a target indication frame, The target indicator box is used to indicate the object that is selected for focusing.
根据权利要求3所述的方法，其特征在于，所述在显示组件上显示第一指示标志，所述第一指示标志用于指示所述对焦参数峰点值，包括：The method according to claim 3, wherein the displaying the first indicator on the display component, the first indicator is used to indicate the focus parameter peak value, comprising:

在显示组件上显示第一边框，所述第一边框用于指示所述对焦参数峰点值；Displaying a first frame on the display component, the first frame is used to indicate the focus parameter peak point value;

所述在所述显示组件上显示第二指示标志，所述第二指示标志用于指示所述当前对焦值，包括：The displaying, on the display component, a second indicator, where the second indicator is used to indicate the current focus value, including:

在所述显示组件上显示第二边框，所述第二边框用于指示所述当前对焦值；Displaying a second frame on the display component, the second frame is used to indicate the current focus value;

其中，所述第二边框的中心和所述第一边框的中心重叠。The center of the second frame overlaps with the center of the first frame.
根据权利要求13所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一边框的大小不变，所述第二边框的大小随着所述对焦调节组件的调整位置的变化而变化。The method according to claim 13, wherein the size of the first frame is constant, and the size of the second frame varies with a change in the adjustment position of the focus adjustment component.
根据权利要求13或14所述的方法，其特征在于，所述在所述显示组件上显示第二边框，包括：The method according to claim 13 or 14, wherein the displaying the second border on the display component comprises:

如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二边框显示在所述第一边框的里面；If the current focus value is less than the focus parameter peak point value, displaying the second border inside the first frame;

如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二边框显示在所述第一边框的外面；If the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, displaying the second frame outside the first frame;

如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二边框显示覆盖在所述第一边框上。If the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, overlaying the second border display on the first border.
根据权利要求13或14所述的方法，其特征在于，所述在所述显示组件上显示第二边框，包括：The method according to claim 13 or 14, wherein the displaying the second border on the display component comprises:

如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二边框显示在所述第一边框的里面；If the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, displaying the second border inside the first frame;

如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二边框显示在所述第一边框的外面；If the current focus value is smaller than the focus parameter peak point value, displaying the second frame outside the first frame;

如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二边框显示覆盖在所述第一边框上。If the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, overlaying the second border display on the first border.
根据权利要求13-16任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一边框为目标指示框，所述目标指示框用于指示选择对焦的对象。Method according to any of claims 13-16, wherein said first The bezel is a target indication frame, and the target indication frame is used to indicate an object that selects focus.
根据权利要求13-17任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，在对焦完成的预设时间之后，所述第二边框消失。The method according to any one of claims 13-17, wherein the second frame disappears after a preset time of focusing completion.
根据权利要求13所述的方法，其特征在于，所述在显示组件上显示第一边框，所述第一边框用于指示所述对焦参数峰点值，包括：The method according to claim 13, wherein the first frame is displayed on the display component, and the first frame is used to indicate the focus parameter peak point value, including:

在显示组件上显示第一环，所述第一环用于指示所述对焦参数峰点值；Displaying a first ring on the display component, the first ring being used to indicate the focus parameter peak point value;

所述在所述显示组件上显示第二边框，所述第二边框用于指示所述当前对焦值，包括：The second frame is displayed on the display component, and the second frame is used to indicate the current focus value, including:

在显示组件上显示第二环，所述第二环用于指示所述当前对焦值；Displaying a second ring on the display component, the second ring being used to indicate the current focus value;

其中，所述第二环和所述第一环是同心圆。Wherein the second ring and the first ring are concentric circles.
根据权利要求19所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一环的大小不变，所述第二环的大小随着所述对焦调节组件的调整位置的变化而变化。The method according to claim 19, wherein the size of the first loop is constant, and the size of the second loop varies with a change in an adjustment position of the focus adjustment component.
根据权利要求19或20所述的方法，其特征在于，所述在显示组件上显示第二环，包括：The method according to claim 19 or 20, wherein the displaying the second ring on the display component comprises:

如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二环显示在所述第一环的里面；If the current focus value is less than the focus parameter peak point value, displaying the second ring inside the first ring;

如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二环显示在所述第一环的外面；If the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, displaying the second ring outside the first ring;

如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二环显示覆盖在所述第一环上。If the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, the second ring display is overlaid on the first ring.
根据权利要求19或20所述的方法，其特征在于，所述在显示组件上显示第二环，包括：The method according to claim 19 or 20, wherein the displaying the second ring on the display component comprises:

如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二环显示在所述第一环的里面；If the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, displaying the second ring inside the first ring;

如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二环显示在所述第一环的外面；Displaying the second ring outside the first ring if the current focus value is less than the focus parameter peak point value;

如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二环显示覆盖在所述第一环上。 If the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, the second ring display is overlaid on the first ring.
根据权利要求19-22任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一环为目标指示框，所述目标指示框用于指示选择对焦的对象。The method according to any one of claims 19 to 22, wherein the first ring is a target indication frame, and the target indication frame is used to indicate an object to be in focus.
根据权利要求19-23任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，在对焦完成的预设时间之后，所述第二环消失。The method according to any one of claims 19-23, wherein the second loop disappears after a preset time of focusing completion.
根据权利要求3所述的方法，其特征在于，所述在显示组件上显示第一指示标志，所述第一指示标志用于指示所述对焦参数峰点值，包括：The method according to claim 3, wherein the displaying the first indicator on the display component, the first indicator is used to indicate the focus parameter peak value, comprising:

在显示组件上显示一线段，所述线段用于指示所述对焦参数峰点值；Displaying a line segment on the display component, the line segment being used to indicate the focus parameter peak point value;

所述在所述显示组件上显示第二指示标志，所述第二指示标志用于指示所述当前对焦值，包括：The displaying, on the display component, a second indicator, where the second indicator is used to indicate the current focus value, including:

在显示组件上显示一半圆，所述半圆用于指示所述当前对焦值；Displaying a half circle on the display component, the semicircle being used to indicate the current focus value;

其中，所述线段的中心和所述半圆的圆心重叠，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离包括所述半圆底部的直径与所述线段之间的夹角。Wherein, a center of the line segment and a center of the semicircle overlap, and an indication distance between the first indicator mark and the second indicator mark includes an angle between a diameter of the bottom of the semicircle and the line segment.
根据权利要求25所述的方法，其特征在于，所述线段的位置不变；The method of claim 25 wherein the position of the line segment is unchanged;

当所述对焦调节组件的调整位置变化时，所述半圆以其圆心为旋转中心旋转。When the adjustment position of the focus adjustment assembly changes, the semicircle rotates with its center of rotation as a center of rotation.
根据权利要求25或26所述的方法，其特征在于，A method according to claim 25 or 26, wherein

如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则所述半圆底部的直径与所述线段之间的夹角是所述半圆以其圆心为旋转中心逆时针旋转形成的；If the current focus value is smaller than the focus parameter peak point value, the angle between the diameter of the semicircle bottom and the line segment is formed by the counterclockwise rotation of the semicircle with its center of rotation as a center of rotation;

如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则所述半圆底部的直径与所述线段之间的夹角是所述半圆以其圆心为旋转中心顺时针旋转形成的；If the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, the angle between the diameter of the semicircle bottom and the line segment is formed by the clockwise rotation of the semicircle with its center of rotation as a center of rotation;

如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则所述半圆底部的直径与所述线段重叠。If the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, the diameter of the semicircle bottom overlaps the line segment.
根据权利要求25或26所述的方法，其特征在于，A method according to claim 25 or 26, wherein

如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则所述半圆底部的直径与所述线段之间的夹角是所述半圆以其圆心为旋转中心逆时针旋转形成的； If the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, the angle between the diameter of the semicircle bottom and the line segment is formed by the counterclockwise rotation of the semicircle with its center of rotation as a center of rotation;

如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则所述半圆底部的直径与所述线段之间的夹角是所述半圆以其圆心为旋转中心顺时针旋转形成的；If the current focus value is smaller than the focus parameter peak point value, the angle between the diameter of the semicircle bottom and the line segment is formed by the clockwise rotation of the semicircle with its center of rotation as a center of rotation;

如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则所述半圆底部的直径与所述线段重叠。If the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, the diameter of the semicircle bottom overlaps the line segment.
根据权利要求25-28任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述线段和所述半圆位于目标指示环内，所述目标指示环用于指示选择对焦的对象。A method according to any one of claims 25 to 28, wherein the line segment and the semicircle are located within a target indicating ring, the target indicating ring being used to indicate an object in which focus is selected.
根据权利要求29所述的方法，其特征在于，所述目标指示环的半径大于或等于所述半圆的半径。The method of claim 29 wherein the radius of the target indicating ring is greater than or equal to the radius of the semicircle.
根据权利要求3所述的方法，其特征在于，所述在显示组件上显示第一指示标志，所述第一指示标志用于指示所述对焦参数峰点值，包括：The method according to claim 3, wherein the displaying the first indicator on the display component, the first indicator is used to indicate the focus parameter peak value, comprising:

在显示组件上显示第一线段，所述第一线段用于指示所述对焦参数峰点值；Displaying a first line segment on the display component, the first line segment being used to indicate the focus parameter peak point value;

所述在所述显示组件上显示第二指示标志，所述第二指示标志用于指示所述当前对焦值，包括：The displaying, on the display component, a second indicator, where the second indicator is used to indicate the current focus value, including:

在显示组件上显示第二线段，所述第二线段用于指示所述当前对焦值；Displaying a second line segment on the display component, the second line segment being used to indicate the current focus value;

其中，所述第一线段的中心和所述第二线段的中心重叠，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离包括所述第一线段和所述第二线段之间的夹角。The center of the first line segment and the center of the second line segment overlap, and the indication distance between the first indicator mark and the second indicator mark includes the first line segment and the second line The angle between the segments.
根据权利要求31所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一线段的位置不变；The method according to claim 31, wherein the position of the first line segment is unchanged;

当所述对焦调节组件的调整位置变化时，所述第二线段以其中心为旋转中心旋转。When the adjustment position of the focus adjustment assembly changes, the second line segment rotates with its center as a center of rotation.
根据权利要求31或32所述的方法，其特征在于，A method according to claim 31 or 32, wherein

如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则所述第一线段和所述第二线段之间的夹角是所述第二线段以其中心为旋转中心逆时针旋转形成的；If the current focus value is smaller than the focus parameter peak point value, an angle between the first line segment and the second line segment is formed by the counterclockwise rotation of the second line segment with its center as a center of rotation ;

如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则所述第一线段和所述第二线段之间的夹角是所述第二线段以其中心为旋转中心顺时针旋转形成的；If the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, the first line segment and the The angle between the second line segments is formed by the clockwise rotation of the second line segment with its center as the center of rotation;

如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则所述第一线段和所述第二线段重叠。If the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, the first line segment and the second line segment overlap.
根据权利要求31或32所述的方法，其特征在于，A method according to claim 31 or 32, wherein

如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则所述第一线段和所述第二线段之间的夹角是所述第二线段以其中心为旋转中心逆时针旋转形成的；If the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, an angle between the first line segment and the second line segment is formed by the counterclockwise rotation of the second line segment with its center as a center of rotation ;

如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则所述第一线段和所述第二线段之间的夹角是所述第二线段以其中心为旋转中心顺时针旋转形成的；If the current focus value is smaller than the focus parameter peak point value, an angle between the first line segment and the second line segment is formed by clockwise rotation of the second line segment with its center as a center of rotation ;

如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则所述第一线段和所述第二线段重叠。If the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, the first line segment and the second line segment overlap.
根据权利要求31-34任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一线段和所述第二线段位于目标指示环内，所述目标指示环用于指示选择对焦的对象。A method according to any one of claims 31 to 34, wherein the first line segment and the second line segment are located within a target indicating ring, the target indicating ring being used to indicate an object in which focus is selected.
根据权利要求35所述的方法，其特征在于，所述目标指示环的直径大于或等于所述第一线段的长度；或者The method of claim 35, wherein the target indicating ring has a diameter greater than or equal to a length of the first line segment; or

所述目标指示环的直径大于或等于所述第二线段的长度。The diameter of the target indicating ring is greater than or equal to the length of the second line segment.
根据权利要求3所述的方法，其特征在于，所述显示组件包括屏幕；The method of claim 3 wherein said display component comprises a screen;

所述方法还包括：The method further includes:

将所述当前图像显示在所述屏幕上，其中，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志覆盖在所述当前图像上。Displaying the current image on the screen, wherein the first indicator and the second indicator are overlaid on the current image.
根据权利要求3所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：The method of claim 3, wherein the method further comprises:

在所述显示组件上显示用于提示对焦对象的目标指示框。A target indication frame for prompting the focused object is displayed on the display component.
根据权利要求38所述的方法，其特征在于，所述目标指示框包括目标提示环。The method of claim 38 wherein said target indication frame comprises a target cueing ring.
根据权利要求38或39所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志中的至少一个显示在所述目标指示框之外、距离所述目标指示框在预设距离范围内的位置。The method according to claim 38 or 39, wherein at least one of the first indicator mark and the second indicator mark is displayed outside the target indication frame at a distance The target indicates a position of the frame within a preset distance range.
根据权利要求38或39所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志中的至少一个显示在所述目标指示框之内。The method of claim 38 or 39, wherein at least one of the first indicator and the second indicator is displayed within the target indication frame.
根据权利要求38或39所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志中的至少一个显示在所述目标指示框上。The method according to claim 38 or 39, wherein at least one of the first indication mark and the second indication mark is displayed on the target indication frame.
根据权利要求39-42任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，在对焦完成的预设时间之后，所述目标指示框消失。The method according to any one of claims 39-42, wherein the target indication frame disappears after a preset time of focusing completion.
根据权利要求3所述的方法，其特征在于，在对焦完成的预设时间之后，所述第一指示标志和/或所述第二指示标志消失。The method according to claim 3, wherein the first indicator mark and/or the second indicator mark disappear after a preset time of focusing completion.
根据权利要求3所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离与所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值之间的差值成比例。The method according to claim 3, wherein a difference between the indicated distance between the first indication mark and the second indication mark and the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value Proportionate.
根据权利要求3所述的方法，其特征在于，还包括：The method of claim 3, further comprising:

根据所述对焦调节组件的调整位置的变化，更新所述当前对焦值。The current focus value is updated according to a change in the adjustment position of the focus adjustment component.
根据权利要求46所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离随着所述对焦调节组件的调整位置的变化而均匀变化。The method according to claim 46, wherein the indication distance between the first indication mark and the second indication mark changes uniformly with a change in an adjustment position of the focus adjustment component.
根据权利要求46所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离随着所述对焦调节组件的调整位置的变化而非均匀变化。The method according to claim 46, wherein the indication distance between the first indication mark and the second indication mark varies non-uniformly with a change in an adjustment position of the focus adjustment component.
根据权利要求46所述的方法，其特征在于，所述根据所述对焦调节组件的调整位置的变化，更新所述当前对焦值，包括：The method according to claim 46, wherein the updating the current focus value according to a change in an adjustment position of the focus adjustment component comprises:

根据对焦环的转动角度，更新所述当前对焦值。The current focus value is updated according to the rotation angle of the focus ring.
根据权利要求49所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离随着对焦环的转动角度均匀变化。The method according to claim 49, wherein the indication distance between the first indication mark and the second indication mark changes uniformly with the rotation angle of the focus ring.
根据权利要求49所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离随着对焦环的转动角度非均匀变化。The method according to claim 49, wherein the indication distance between the first indicator mark and the second indicator mark varies non-uniformly with a rotation angle of the focus ring.
根据权利要求51所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离的变化率随着所述指示距离的减小而增大。 The method according to claim 51, wherein a rate of change of the indicated distance between the first indicator mark and the second indicator mark increases as the indicated distance decreases.
根据权利要求51或52所述的方法，其特征在于，当所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离在不同预设范围内时，所述指示距离的变化率不同，所述预设范围和所述指示距离的变化率一一对应。The method according to claim 51 or 52, wherein when the indication distance between the first indication mark and the second indication mark is within a different preset range, the change rate of the indication distance is different And the preset range and the change rate of the indication distance are in one-to-one correspondence.
根据权利要求52或53所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离的变化率包括所述对焦环转动单位角度时所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离的变化量。The method according to claim 52 or 53, wherein the rate of change of the indicated distance between the first indicator mark and the second indicator mark comprises the first indication when the focus ring rotates by a unit angle The amount of change in the indicated distance between the flag and the second indicator.
根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,对焦距离随着所述对焦调节组件的调整位置的变化而均匀变化。The method of claim 1 wherein the focus distance varies uniformly as the adjusted position of the focus adjustment assembly changes.
根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,对焦距离随着所述对焦调节组件的调整位置的变化而非均匀变化。The method of claim 1 wherein the focus distance varies non-uniformly as the adjusted position of the focus adjustment assembly changes.
根据权利要求56所述的方法,其特征在于,所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值之间的差值越小，相同的调整位置的变化量引起的对焦距离的变化量越小。The method according to claim 56, wherein the smaller the difference between the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value is, the smaller the amount of change in the focus distance caused by the change amount of the same adjustment position is. .
根据权利要求55所述的方法,其特征在于,对焦距离随着对焦环的转动角度均匀变化。The method of claim 55 wherein the focus distance varies uniformly with the angle of rotation of the focus ring.
根据权利要求56所述的方法,其特征在于,对焦距离随着对焦环的转动角度非均匀变化。The method of claim 56 wherein the focus distance varies non-uniformly with the angle of rotation of the focus ring.
根据权利要求59所述的方法,其特征在于,所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值之间的差值越小，相同的转动角度引起的对焦距离的变化量越小。The method according to claim 59, wherein the smaller the difference between the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value, the smaller the amount of change in the focus distance caused by the same rotation angle.
根据权利要求3所述的方法，其特征在于，还包括：The method of claim 3, further comprising:

检测拍摄设备是否发生移动；Detecting whether the shooting device has moved;

如果所述拍摄设备移动，则停止显示所述第一指示标志和/或所述第二指示标志。If the photographing device moves, the display of the first indicator mark and/or the second indicator mark is stopped.
根据权利要求61所述的方法，其特征在于，所述检测拍摄设备是否发生移动，包括：The method according to claim 61, wherein the detecting whether the photographing device has moved comprises:

采用所述拍摄设备设置的运动传感器，检测拍摄设备是否发生移动。A motion sensor provided by the photographing device is used to detect whether the photographing device has moved.
根据权利要求62所述的方法，其特征在于，所述运动传感器包括如下至少一种： The method of claim 62 wherein said motion sensor comprises at least one of:

陀螺仪、加速度计、惯性测量单元。Gyro, accelerometer, inertial measurement unit.
根据权利要求61所述的方法，其特征在于，所述检测拍摄设备是否发生移动，包括：The method according to claim 61, wherein the detecting whether the photographing device has moved comprises:

检测当前图像相对于显示组件是否发生移动。Detects whether the current image has moved relative to the display component.
根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，还包括：The method of claim 1 further comprising:

接收对当前图像中对焦对象的选择指令。Receives a selection instruction for the focus object in the current image.
根据权利要求65所述的方法，其特征在于，所述接收对当前图像中对焦对象的选择指令，包括：The method according to claim 65, wherein said receiving a selection instruction for a focus object in a current image comprises:

接收对当前图像中对焦对象上的对焦点的选择指令。A selection instruction to receive a focus point on a focus object in the current image is received.
根据权利要求65所述的方法，其特征在于，所述当前图像显示在触摸屏上；The method according to claim 65, wherein said current image is displayed on a touch screen;

所述接收对当前图像中对焦对象的选择指令，包括：The receiving a selection instruction for a focus object in a current image includes:

检测对所述触摸屏上显示的对焦对象的触摸操作。A touch operation on a focus object displayed on the touch screen is detected.
根据权利要求1或2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述根据所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值进行对焦提示，包括：The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the performing the focus prompt according to the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value comprises:

如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则控制拍摄设备上多个发光组件中的第一发光组件发光；Controlling, by the first illumination component, the plurality of illumination components on the photographing device to emit light if the current focus value is less than the focus parameter peak point value;

如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则控制拍摄设备上多个发光组件中的第二发光组件发光；Controlling, by the second illumination component, the plurality of illumination components on the photographing device to emit light if the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value;

如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则控制拍摄设备上多个发光组件中的第三发光组件发光。If the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, controlling the third one of the plurality of light emitting components on the photographing device to emit light.
根据权利要求68所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第三发光组件位于所述多个发光组件的中间位置，所述第一发光组件和第二发光组件分别位于所述第三发光组件的两侧。The method according to claim 68, wherein said third lighting component is located at an intermediate position of said plurality of lighting components, said first lighting component and said second lighting component being respectively located at said third lighting component On both sides.
根据权利要求69所述的方法，其特征在于，The method of claim 69, wherein

当所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值时，所述当前对焦值和所述对焦参数峰点值之间的差值的绝对值越大，所述第一发光组件和所述第三发光组件之间的距离越远；When the current focus value is smaller than the focus parameter peak point value, the absolute value of the difference between the current focus value and the focus parameter peak point value is larger, the first illumination component and the first The further the distance between the three light-emitting components;

当所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值时，所述当前对焦值和所述对焦参数峰点值之间的差值的绝对值越大，所述第二发光组件和所述第三发光组件之间的距离越远。When the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, the absolute value of the difference between the current focus value and the focus parameter peak point value is larger, the second illumination component and the first The further the distance between the three illuminating components.
根据权利要求68-70任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述发光组件包括LED。A method according to any of claims 68-70, wherein the lighting assembly comprises an LED.
根据权利要求2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述根据所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值进行对焦提示，包括：The method according to claim 2, wherein the performing the focus prompt according to the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value comprises:

通过在显示组件上显示数值以标识所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值之间的差值。A difference between the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value is identified by displaying a value on the display component.
根据权利要求72所述的方法，其特征在于，所述通过在显示组件上显示数值以标识所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值之间的差值，包括：The method according to claim 72, wherein said displaying a value on said display component to identify a difference between said focus parameter peak point value and said current focus value comprises:

如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则在显示组件上显示负数，所述负数的绝对值表示所述当前对焦值和所述对焦参数峰点值之间差值的绝对值；If the current focus value is less than the focus parameter peak point value, displaying a negative number on the display component, the absolute value of the negative number indicating an absolute value of a difference between the current focus value and the focus parameter peak point value ;

如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则在显示组件上显示正数，所述正数表示所述当前对焦值和所述对焦参数峰点值之间差值的绝对值；If the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, displaying a positive number on the display component, the positive number indicating an absolute value of a difference between the current focus value and the focus parameter peak point value;

如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则在显示组件上显示0。If the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, 0 is displayed on the display component.
根据权利要求72或73所述的方法，其特征在于，所述数值的绝对值用于表示对焦环需要转动的角度。A method according to claim 72 or 73, wherein the absolute value of said value is used to indicate the angle at which the focus ring needs to be rotated.
根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述根据所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值进行对焦提示，包括：The method according to claim 1, wherein the performing the focus prompt according to the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value comprises:

通过控制拍摄设备的发声组件发出音频信号以标识所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值之间的差值。An audio signal is emitted by controlling a sounding component of the photographing device to identify a difference between the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value.
根据权利要求75所述的方法，其特征在于，所述通过控制拍摄设备的发声组件发出音频信号以标识所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值之间的差值，包括：The method according to claim 75, wherein said generating an audio signal by controlling a sounding component of the photographing device to identify a difference between said focus parameter peak point value and said current focus value comprises:

如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则控制拍摄设备的发声组件发出第一音频信号；If the current focus value is less than the focus parameter peak point value, controlling the sounding component of the photographing device to emit a first audio signal;

如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则控制拍摄设备的发声组件发出第二音频信号；Controlling the transmission of the photographing device if the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value The acoustic component emits a second audio signal;

如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则控制拍摄设备的发声组件发出第三音频信号或不发声。If the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, controlling the sounding component of the photographing device to emit a third audio signal or no sound.
根据权利要求76所述的方法，其特征在于，The method of claim 76 wherein:

当所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值时，所述当前对焦值和所述对焦参数峰点值的差值的绝对值越小，所述第一音频信号的音量和/或重复频率越大；When the current focus value is smaller than the focus parameter peak point value, the smaller the absolute value of the difference between the current focus value and the focus parameter peak point value, the volume and/or repetition of the first audio signal The higher the frequency;

当所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值时，所述当前对焦值和所述对焦参数峰点值的差值的绝对值越小，所述第二音频信号的音量和/或重复频率越大。When the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, the smaller the absolute value of the difference between the current focus value and the focus parameter peak point value, the volume and/or repetition of the second audio signal The higher the frequency.
根据权利要求76所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一音频信号包括负数，所述负数的绝对值表示所述当前对焦值和所述对焦参数峰点值之间差值的绝对值；The method according to claim 76, wherein said first audio signal comprises a negative number, and said absolute value of said negative number represents an absolute value of a difference between said current focus value and said focus parameter peak point value;

所述第二音频信号包括正数，所述正数表示所述当前对焦值和所述对焦参数峰点值之间差值的绝对值；The second audio signal includes a positive number, and the positive number represents an absolute value of a difference between the current focus value and the focus parameter peak point value;

所述第三音频信号包括0。The third audio signal includes zero.
根据权利要求78所述的方法，其特征在于，所述负数的绝对值和/或所述正数表示对焦环需要转动的角度。80. Method according to claim 78, characterized in that the absolute value of the negative number and/or the positive number represent the angle at which the focus ring needs to be rotated.
根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述根据所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值进行对焦提示，包括：The method according to claim 1, wherein the performing the focus prompt according to the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value comprises:

通过控制拍摄设备的震动组件以标识所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值之间的差值。A difference between the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value is identified by controlling a vibration component of the photographing device.
根据权利要求80所述的方法，其特征在于，所述通过控制拍摄设备的震动组件以标识所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值之间的差值，包括：The method according to claim 80, wherein the controlling the vibration component of the photographing device to identify the difference between the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value comprises:

如果所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值不等，则控制拍摄设备的震动组件震动；Controlling the vibration component of the photographing device to vibrate if the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value are not equal;

如果所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值相等，则控制拍摄设备的震动组件不震动。If the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value are equal, the vibration component of the photographing device is controlled not to vibrate.
根据权利要求81所述的方法，其特征在于，所述震动组件的震动频率与所述当前对焦值和所述对焦参数峰点值之间的差值相关；或/及The method of claim 81, wherein the shock component is shaken The dynamic frequency is related to a difference between the current focus value and the focus parameter peak point value; or/and

所述震动组件的震动强度与所述当前对焦值和所述对焦参数峰点值之间的差值相关。The vibration intensity of the vibration component is related to a difference between the current focus value and the focus parameter peak point value.
根据权利要求82所述的方法，其特征在于，所述当前对焦值和所述对焦参数峰点值的差值的绝对值越小，所述震动组件的震动频率和/或震动强度越大。The method according to claim 82, wherein the smaller the absolute value of the difference between the current focus value and the focus parameter peak point value, the greater the vibration frequency and/or the vibration intensity of the vibration component.
根据权利要求82所述的方法，其特征在于，所述当前对焦值和所述对焦参数峰点值的差值的绝对值越大，所述震动组件的震动频率和/或震动强度越大。The method according to claim 82, wherein the greater the absolute value of the difference between the current focus value and the focus parameter peak point value, the greater the vibration frequency and/or the vibration intensity of the vibration component.
根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述计算当前图像中对焦对象在合焦时的对焦参数峰点值，包括：The method according to claim 1, wherein the calculating a focus parameter peak point value of the in-focus object in the current image when the focus is in focus comprises:

对所述当前图像进行图像分析，得到对焦评价函数；Performing image analysis on the current image to obtain a focus evaluation function;

根据对焦评价函数计算当前图像中对焦对象在合焦时的对焦参数峰点值。The focus parameter peak value of the focus object in the current image at the time of focusing is calculated according to the focus evaluation function.
根据权利要求85所述的方法，其特征在于，所述对所述当前图像进行图像分析，得到对焦评价函数，包括：The method according to claim 85, wherein said performing image analysis on said current image to obtain a focus evaluation function comprises:

在频域对所述当前图像进行图像分析，得到对焦评价函数。Image analysis is performed on the current image in the frequency domain to obtain a focus evaluation function.
根据权利要求86所述的方法，其特征在于，所述在频域对所述当前图像进行图像分析，包括：The method according to claim 86, wherein the performing image analysis on the current image in the frequency domain comprises:

基于离散小波变换对所述当前图像进行图像分析。Image analysis is performed on the current image based on a discrete wavelet transform.
根据权利要求86所述的方法，其特征在于，所述在频域对所述当前图像进行图像分析，包括：The method according to claim 86, wherein the performing image analysis on the current image in the frequency domain comprises:

基于离散余弦变换对所述当前图像进行图像分析。Image analysis is performed on the current image based on a discrete cosine transform.
根据权利要求85所述的方法，其特征在于，所述对所述当前图像进行图像分析，得到对焦评价函数，包括：The method according to claim 85, wherein said performing image analysis on said current image to obtain a focus evaluation function comprises:

对所述当前图像进行图像分析，得到所述当前图像的信息熵，将所述信息熵作为对焦评价函数。Performing image analysis on the current image to obtain information entropy of the current image, and using the information entropy as a focus evaluation function.
根据权利要求85所述的方法，其特征在于，所述对所述当前图像进行图像分析，得到对焦评价函数，包括：The method according to claim 85, wherein said performing image analysis on said current image to obtain a focus evaluation function comprises:

对所述当前图像进行微分运算，得到所述当前图像的灰度差分值，将所述当前图像的灰度差分值作为对焦评价函数。Performing a differential operation on the current image to obtain a grayscale difference value of the current image, which will The grayscale difference value of the current image is used as a focus evaluation function.
一种控制装置，其特征在于，包括：存储器和处理器；A control device, comprising: a memory and a processor;

所述存储器用于存储程序代码；The memory is for storing program code;

所述处理器，调用所述程序代码，当程序代码被执行时，用于执行以下操作：The processor calls the program code to perform the following operations when the program code is executed:

计算当前图像中对焦对象在合焦时的对焦参数峰点值；Calculating a focus parameter peak value of the focus object in the current image when the focus is in focus;

计算对焦调节组件当前的调整位置对应的当前对焦值；Calculating a current focus value corresponding to a current adjustment position of the focus adjustment component;

根据所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值进行对焦提示，提示用户操作所述对焦调节组件，以使所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值一致。And performing a focus prompt according to the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value, prompting the user to operate the focus adjustment component to make the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value coincide.
根据权利要求91所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述对焦调节组件包括如下至少一种：The control device according to claim 91, wherein said focus adjustment component comprises at least one of the following:

对焦环、调节按钮、调整轮。Focus ring, adjustment button, adjustment wheel.
根据权利要求91或92所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述处理器根据所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值进行对焦提示时，具体用于：The control device according to claim 91 or 92, wherein when the processor performs a focus prompt according to the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value, it is specifically used for:

在显示组件上显示第一指示标志，所述第一指示标志用于指示所述对焦参数峰点值；Displaying a first indicator on the display component, the first indicator is used to indicate the focus parameter peak point value;

在所述显示组件上显示第二指示标志，所述第二指示标志用于指示所述当前对焦值；Displaying a second indicator on the display component, the second indicator is used to indicate the current focus value;

其中，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离与所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值之间的差值相关。The indication distance between the first indication mark and the second indication mark is related to a difference between the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value.
根据权利要求93所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述处理器在显示组件上显示第一指示标志时，具体用于：The control device according to claim 93, wherein when the processor displays the first indicator on the display component, the method is specifically configured to:

在显示组件的预设区域显示第一指示标志；Displaying a first indicator mark in a preset area of the display component;

相应的，所述处理器在所述显示组件上显示第二指示标志时，具体用于：Correspondingly, when the processor displays the second indicator on the display component, specifically:

如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二指示标志显示在所述预设区域的第一侧；If the current focus value is less than the focus parameter peak point value, displaying the second indicator mark on a first side of the preset area;

如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二指示标志显示在所述预设区域的第二侧，所述第二侧与所述第一侧相对；If the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, the second indicator is Displayed on a second side of the predetermined area, the second side being opposite to the first side;

如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二指示标志显示在所述预设区域，所述第二指示标志和所述第一指示标志重叠。And if the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, displaying the second indication mark in the preset area, where the second indication mark and the first indication mark overlap.
根据权利要求94所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述预设区域包括所述对焦对象。The control device according to claim 94, wherein said preset area includes said in-focus object.
根据权利要求94或95所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述预设区域包括目标指示框，所述目标指示框用于指示选择对焦的对象。The control device according to claim 94 or 95, wherein the preset area comprises a target indication frame for indicating an object to be in focus.
根据权利要求93所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述处理器在显示组件上显示第一指示标志时，具体用于：The control device according to claim 93, wherein when the processor displays the first indicator on the display component, the method is specifically configured to:

在显示组件上显示的刻度图像上显示所述第一指示标志；Displaying the first indicator on a scale image displayed on the display component;

所述处理器在所述显示组件上显示第二指示标志时，具体用于：When the processor displays the second indicator on the display component, specifically:

在显示组件上显示的刻度图像上显示所述第二指示标志；Displaying the second indicator mark on the scale image displayed on the display component;

其中，所述第一指示标志位于所述刻度图像上的固定位置，所述第二指示标志随着所述对焦调节组件的调整位置的变化，在所述刻度图像上移动。The first indicator is located at a fixed position on the scale image, and the second indicator moves on the scale image as the adjustment position of the focus adjustment component changes.
根据权利要求97所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述处理器在显示组件上显示的刻度图像上显示所述第一指示标志时，具体用于：The control device according to claim 97, wherein the processor is configured to: when the first indicator is displayed on the scale image displayed on the display component, specifically:

在显示组件上显示的刻度图像的中间位置显示第一指示标志；Displaying a first indicator mark at an intermediate position of the scale image displayed on the display component;

相应的，所述处理器在显示组件上显示的刻度图像上显示所述第二指示标志时，具体用于：Correspondingly, when the processor displays the second indicator on the scale image displayed on the display component, specifically:

如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二指示标志显示在所述刻度图像上所述中间位置的第一侧；If the current focus value is less than the focus parameter peak point value, displaying the second indicator mark on a first side of the intermediate position on the scale image;

如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二指示标志显示在所述刻度图像上所述中间位置的第二侧，所述第二侧与所述第一侧相对；If the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, displaying the second indicator mark on a second side of the intermediate position on the scale image, the second side and the first side relatively;

如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二指示标志显示在所述中间位置。If the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, the second indicator flag is displayed at the intermediate position.
根据权利要求97或98所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述刻度图像包括刻度曲线。The control device according to claim 97 or 98, wherein the scale image comprises a scale curve.
根据权利要求99所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述刻度曲线呈半圆弧。The control device according to claim 99, wherein said scale curve It is a semi-circular arc.
根据权利要求97或98所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述刻度图像包括刻度直线。The control device according to claim 97 or 98, wherein the scale image comprises a scale line.
根据权利要求98所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述刻度图像的中间位置位于所述显示组件的预设区域，所述预设区域包括目标指示框，所述目标指示框用于指示选择对焦的对象。The control device according to claim 98, wherein an intermediate position of the scale image is located in a preset area of the display component, the preset area includes a target indication frame, and the target indication frame is used to indicate selection The object to focus on.
根据权利要求93所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述处理器在显示组件上显示第一指示标志，所述第一指示标志用于指示所述对焦参数峰点值时，具体用于：The control device according to claim 93, wherein the processor displays a first indication mark on the display component, and the first indication flag is used to indicate the focus parameter peak point value, specifically for:

在显示组件上显示第一边框，所述第一边框用于指示所述对焦参数峰点值；Displaying a first frame on the display component, the first frame is used to indicate the focus parameter peak point value;

所述处理器在所述显示组件上显示第二指示标志，所述第二指示标志用于指示所述当前对焦值时，具体用于：The processor displays a second indicator on the display component, and the second indicator is used to indicate the current focus value, specifically for:

在所述显示组件上显示第二边框，所述第二边框用于指示所述当前对焦值；Displaying a second frame on the display component, the second frame is used to indicate the current focus value;

其中，所述第二边框的中心和所述第一边框的中心重叠。The center of the second frame overlaps with the center of the first frame.
根据权利要求103所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述第一边框的大小不变，所述第二边框的大小随着所述对焦调节组件的调整位置的变化而变化。The control device according to claim 103, wherein the size of the first frame is constant, and the size of the second frame varies with a change in the adjustment position of the focus adjustment component.
根据权利要求103或104所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述处理器在所述显示组件上显示第二边框时，具体用于：The control device according to claim 103 or 104, wherein when the processor displays the second frame on the display component, the processor is specifically configured to:

如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二边框显示在所述第一边框的里面；If the current focus value is less than the focus parameter peak point value, displaying the second border inside the first frame;

如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二边框显示在所述第一边框的外面；If the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, displaying the second frame outside the first frame;

如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二边框显示覆盖在所述第一边框上。If the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, overlaying the second border display on the first border.
根据权利要求103或104所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述处理器在所述显示组件上显示第二边框时，具体用于：The control device according to claim 103 or 104, wherein when the processor displays the second frame on the display component, the processor is specifically configured to:

如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二边框显示在所述第一边框的里面；If the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, the second border is displayed Shown inside the first frame;

如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二边框显示在所述第一边框的外面；If the current focus value is smaller than the focus parameter peak point value, displaying the second frame outside the first frame;

如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二边框显示覆盖在所述第一边框上。If the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, overlaying the second border display on the first border.
根据权利要求103-106任一项所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述第一边框为目标指示框，所述目标指示框用于指示选择对焦的对象。The control device according to any one of claims 103 to 106, wherein the first frame is a target indication frame, and the target indication frame is used to indicate an object to be in focus.
根据权利要求103-107任一项所述的控制装置，其特征在于，在对焦完成的预设时间之后，所述第二边框消失。The control device according to any one of claims 103 to 107, wherein the second frame disappears after a preset time of focusing completion.
根据权利要求103所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述处理器在显示组件上显示第一边框，所述第一边框用于指示所述对焦参数峰点值时，具体用于：The control device according to claim 103, wherein the processor displays a first frame on the display component, and the first frame is used to indicate the peak value of the focus parameter, specifically for:

在显示组件上显示第一环，所述第一环用于指示所述对焦参数峰点值；Displaying a first ring on the display component, the first ring being used to indicate the focus parameter peak point value;

所述处理器在所述显示组件上显示第二边框，所述第二边框用于指示所述当前对焦值时，具体用于：The processor displays a second frame on the display component, and the second frame is used to indicate the current focus value, specifically for:

在显示组件上显示第二环，所述第二环用于指示所述当前对焦值；Displaying a second ring on the display component, the second ring being used to indicate the current focus value;

其中，所述第二环和所述第一环是同心圆。Wherein the second ring and the first ring are concentric circles.
根据权利要求109所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述第一环的大小不变，所述第二环的大小随着所述对焦调节组件的调整位置的变化而变化。The control device according to claim 109, wherein said first ring has a constant size, and said second ring has a size that varies with a change in an adjustment position of said focus adjustment unit.
根据权利要求109或110所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述处理器在显示组件上显示第二环时，具体用于：The control device according to claim 109 or 110, wherein when the processor displays the second ring on the display component, the method is specifically configured to:

如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二环显示在所述第一环的里面；If the current focus value is less than the focus parameter peak point value, displaying the second ring inside the first ring;

如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二环显示在所述第一环的外面；If the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, displaying the second ring outside the first ring;

如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二环显示覆盖在所述第一环上。If the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, the second ring display is overlaid on the first ring.
根据权利要求109或110所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述处理器在显示组件上显示第二环时，具体用于：A control device according to claim 109 or 110, wherein said said When the processor displays the second ring on the display component, it is specifically used to:

如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二环显示在所述第一环的里面；If the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, displaying the second ring inside the first ring;

如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二环显示在所述第一环的外面；Displaying the second ring outside the first ring if the current focus value is less than the focus parameter peak point value;

如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则将所述第二环显示覆盖在所述第一环上。If the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, the second ring display is overlaid on the first ring.
根据权利要求109-112任一项所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述第一环为目标指示框，所述目标指示框用于指示选择对焦的对象。The control device according to any one of claims 109 to 112, wherein the first ring is a target indication frame, and the target indication frame is used to indicate an object to be in focus.
根据权利要求109-113任一项所述的控制装置，其特征在于，在对焦完成的预设时间之后，所述第二环消失。A control apparatus according to any one of claims 109 to 113, wherein said second loop disappears after a preset time of focusing completion.
根据权利要求93所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述处理器在显示组件上显示第一指示标志，所述第一指示标志用于指示所述对焦参数峰点值时，具体用于：The control device according to claim 93, wherein the processor displays a first indication mark on the display component, and the first indication flag is used to indicate the focus parameter peak point value, specifically for:

在显示组件上显示一线段，所述线段用于指示所述对焦参数峰点值；Displaying a line segment on the display component, the line segment being used to indicate the focus parameter peak point value;

所述处理器在所述显示组件上显示第二指示标志，所述第二指示标志用于指示所述当前对焦值时，具体用于：The processor displays a second indicator on the display component, and the second indicator is used to indicate the current focus value, specifically for:

在显示组件上显示一半圆，所述半圆用于指示所述当前对焦值；Displaying a half circle on the display component, the semicircle being used to indicate the current focus value;

其中，所述线段的中心和所述半圆的圆心重叠，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离包括所述半圆底部的直径与所述线段之间的夹角。Wherein, a center of the line segment and a center of the semicircle overlap, and an indication distance between the first indicator mark and the second indicator mark includes an angle between a diameter of the bottom of the semicircle and the line segment.
根据权利要求115所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述线段的位置不变；The control device according to claim 115, wherein the position of the line segment is unchanged;

当所述对焦调节组件的调整位置变化时，所述半圆以其圆心为旋转中心旋转。When the adjustment position of the focus adjustment assembly changes, the semicircle rotates with its center of rotation as a center of rotation.
根据权利要求115或116所述的控制装置，其特征在于，A control device according to claim 115 or 116, characterized in that

如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则所述半圆底部的直径与所述线段之间的夹角是所述半圆以其圆心为旋转中心逆时针旋转形成的；If the current focus value is smaller than the focus parameter peak point value, the angle between the diameter of the semicircle bottom and the line segment is formed by the counterclockwise rotation of the semicircle with its center of rotation as a center of rotation;

如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则所述半圆底部的直径与所述线段之间的夹角是所述半圆以其圆心为旋转中心顺时针旋转形成的；If the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, the bottom of the semicircle is straight The angle between the diameter and the line segment is formed by the clockwise rotation of the semicircle with its center of rotation as a center of rotation;

如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则所述半圆底部的直径与所述线段重叠。If the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, the diameter of the semicircle bottom overlaps the line segment.
根据权利要求115或116所述的控制装置，其特征在于，A control device according to claim 115 or 116, characterized in that

如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则所述半圆底部的直径与所述线段之间的夹角是所述半圆以其圆心为旋转中心逆时针旋转形成的；If the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, the angle between the diameter of the semicircle bottom and the line segment is formed by the counterclockwise rotation of the semicircle with its center of rotation as a center of rotation;

如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则所述半圆底部的直径与所述线段之间的夹角是所述半圆以其圆心为旋转中心顺时针旋转形成的；If the current focus value is smaller than the focus parameter peak point value, the angle between the diameter of the semicircle bottom and the line segment is formed by the clockwise rotation of the semicircle with its center of rotation as a center of rotation;

如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则所述半圆底部的直径与所述线段重叠。If the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, the diameter of the semicircle bottom overlaps the line segment.
根据权利要求115-118任一项所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述线段和所述半圆位于目标指示环内，所述目标指示环用于指示选择对焦的对象。The control device according to any one of claims 115 to 118, wherein the line segment and the semicircle are located in a target indicating ring, and the target indicating ring is used to indicate an object to be in focus.
根据权利要求119所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述目标指示环的半径大于或等于所述半圆的半径。The control device according to claim 119, wherein the radius of the target indicating ring is greater than or equal to the radius of the semicircle.
根据权利要求93所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述处理器在显示组件上显示第一指示标志，所述第一指示标志用于指示所述对焦参数峰点值时，具体用于：The control device according to claim 93, wherein the processor displays a first indication mark on the display component, and the first indication flag is used to indicate the focus parameter peak point value, specifically for:

在显示组件上显示第一线段，所述第一线段用于指示所述对焦参数峰点值；Displaying a first line segment on the display component, the first line segment being used to indicate the focus parameter peak point value;

所述处理器在所述显示组件上显示第二指示标志，所述第二指示标志用于指示所述当前对焦值时，具体用于：The processor displays a second indicator on the display component, and the second indicator is used to indicate the current focus value, specifically for:

在显示组件上显示第二线段，所述第二线段用于指示所述当前对焦值；Displaying a second line segment on the display component, the second line segment being used to indicate the current focus value;

其中，所述第一线段的中心和所述第二线段的中心重叠，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离包括所述第一线段和所述第二线段之间的夹角。 The center of the first line segment and the center of the second line segment overlap, and the indication distance between the first indicator mark and the second indicator mark includes the first line segment and the second line The angle between the segments.
根据权利要求121所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述第一线段的位置不变；The control device according to claim 121, wherein the position of the first line segment is unchanged;

当所述对焦调节组件的调整位置变化时，所述第二线段以其中心为旋转中心旋转。When the adjustment position of the focus adjustment assembly changes, the second line segment rotates with its center as a center of rotation.
根据权利要求121或122所述的控制装置，其特征在于，A control device according to claim 121 or 122, characterized in that

如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则所述第一线段和所述第二线段之间的夹角是所述第二线段以其中心为旋转中心逆时针旋转形成的；If the current focus value is smaller than the focus parameter peak point value, an angle between the first line segment and the second line segment is formed by the counterclockwise rotation of the second line segment with its center as a center of rotation ;

如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则所述第一线段和所述第二线段之间的夹角是所述第二线段以其中心为旋转中心顺时针旋转形成的；If the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, an angle between the first line segment and the second line segment is formed by clockwise rotation of the second line segment with its center as a center of rotation ;

如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则所述第一线段和所述第二线段重叠。If the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, the first line segment and the second line segment overlap.
根据权利要求121或122所述的控制装置，其特征在于，A control device according to claim 121 or 122, characterized in that

如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则所述第一线段和所述第二线段之间的夹角是所述第二线段以其中心为旋转中心逆时针旋转形成的；If the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, an angle between the first line segment and the second line segment is formed by the counterclockwise rotation of the second line segment with its center as a center of rotation ;

如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则所述第一线段和所述第二线段之间的夹角是所述第二线段以其中心为旋转中心顺时针旋转形成的；If the current focus value is smaller than the focus parameter peak point value, an angle between the first line segment and the second line segment is formed by clockwise rotation of the second line segment with its center as a center of rotation ;

如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则所述第一线段和所述第二线段重叠。If the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, the first line segment and the second line segment overlap.
根据权利要求121-124任一项所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述第一线段和所述第二线段位于目标指示环内，所述目标指示环用于指示选择对焦的对象。The control device according to any one of claims 121 to 124, wherein the first line segment and the second line segment are located in a target indicating ring, and the target indicating ring is used to indicate an object to be in focus.
根据权利要求125所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述目标指示环的直径大于或等于所述第一线段的长度；或者The control device according to claim 125, wherein the diameter of the target indicating ring is greater than or equal to the length of the first line segment; or

所述目标指示环的直径大于或等于所述第二线段的长度。The diameter of the target indicating ring is greater than or equal to the length of the second line segment.
根据权利要求93所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述显示组件包括屏幕； The control device according to claim 93, wherein said display component comprises a screen;

所述处理器还用于：The processor is further configured to:

将所述当前图像显示在所述屏幕上，其中，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志覆盖在所述当前图像上。Displaying the current image on the screen, wherein the first indicator and the second indicator are overlaid on the current image.
根据权利要求93所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述处理器还用于：The control device according to claim 93, wherein the processor is further configured to:

在所述显示组件上显示用于提示对焦对象的目标指示框。A target indication frame for prompting the focused object is displayed on the display component.
根据权利要求128所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述目标指示框包括目标提示环。The control device according to claim 128, wherein said target indication frame comprises a target cueing ring.
根据权利要求128或129所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志中的至少一个显示在所述目标指示框之外、距离所述目标指示框在预设距离范围内的位置。The control device according to claim 128 or 129, wherein at least one of the first indication mark and the second indication mark is displayed outside the target indication frame, at a distance from the target indication frame The position within the preset distance range.
根据权利要求128或129所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志中的至少一个显示在所述目标指示框之内。The control device according to claim 128 or 129, characterized in that at least one of the first indication mark and the second indication mark is displayed within the target indication frame.
根据权利要求128或129所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志中的至少一个显示在所述目标指示框上。The control device according to claim 128 or 129, characterized in that at least one of the first indication mark and the second indication mark is displayed on the target indication frame.
根据权利要求129-132任一项所述的控制装置，其特征在于，在对焦完成的预设时间之后，所述目标指示框消失。The control device according to any one of claims 129 to 132, wherein the target indication frame disappears after a preset time of focusing completion.
根据权利要求93所述的控制装置，其特征在于，在对焦完成的预设时间之后，所述第一指示标志和/或所述第二指示标志消失。The control device according to claim 93, wherein the first indicator mark and/or the second indicator mark disappear after a preset time of focusing completion.
根据权利要求93所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离与所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值之间的差值成比例。The control device according to claim 93, wherein a difference between the indicated distance between the first indication mark and the second indication mark and the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value The value is proportional.
根据权利要求93所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述处理器还用于：The control device according to claim 93, wherein the processor is further configured to:

根据所述对焦调节组件的调整位置的变化，更新所述当前对焦值。The current focus value is updated according to a change in the adjustment position of the focus adjustment component.
根据权利要求136所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离随着所述对焦调节组件的调整位置的变化而均匀变化。 The control device according to claim 136, characterized in that the indication distance between the first indication mark and the second indication mark changes uniformly with a change in the adjustment position of the focus adjustment unit.
根据权利要求136所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离随着所述对焦调节组件的调整位置的变化而非均匀变化。The control device according to claim 136, wherein the indication distance between the first indication mark and the second indication mark varies non-uniformly with a change in an adjustment position of the focus adjustment unit.
根据权利要求136所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述处理器根据所述对焦调节组件的调整位置的变化，更新所述当前对焦值时，具体用于：The control device according to claim 136, wherein the processor is configured to: when the current focus value is updated according to a change in the adjustment position of the focus adjustment component, specifically:

根据对焦环的转动角度，更新所述当前对焦值。The current focus value is updated according to the rotation angle of the focus ring.
根据权利要求139所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离随着对焦环的转动角度均匀变化。The control device according to claim 139, wherein the indication distance between the first indication mark and the second indication mark changes uniformly with the rotation angle of the focus ring.
根据权利要求139所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离随着对焦环的转动角度非均匀变化。The control device according to claim 139, wherein the indication distance between the first indication mark and the second indication mark varies non-uniformly with a rotation angle of the focus ring.
根据权利要求141所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离的变化率随着所述指示距离的减小而增大。The control device according to claim 141, characterized in that the rate of change of the indication distance between the first indication mark and the second indication mark increases as the indicated distance decreases.
根据权利要求141或142所述的控制装置，其特征在于，当所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离在不同预设范围内时，所述指示距离的变化率不同，所述预设范围和所述指示距离的变化率一一对应。The control device according to claim 141 or 142, wherein a rate of change of the indication distance when the indication distance between the first indication mark and the second indication mark is within a different preset range Differently, the preset range and the change rate of the indication distance are in one-to-one correspondence.
根据权利要求142或143所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离的变化率包括所述对焦环转动单位角度时所述第一指示标志和所述第二指示标志之间的指示距离的变化量。The control device according to claim 142 or 143, wherein a rate of change of the indication distance between the first indication mark and the second indication mark includes the first when the focus ring rotates by a unit angle The amount of change in the indicated distance between the indicator and the second indicator.
根据权利要求91所述的控制装置，其特征在于，对焦距离随着所述对焦调节组件的调整位置的变化而均匀变化。The control device according to claim 91, wherein the focus distance uniformly changes as the adjustment position of the focus adjustment unit changes.
根据权利要求91所述的控制装置，其特征在于，对焦距离随着所述对焦调节组件的调整位置的变化而非均匀变化。The control device according to claim 91, wherein the focus distance varies uniformly with the adjustment position of the focus adjustment unit.
根据权利要求146所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值之间的差值越小，相同的调整位置的变化量引起的对焦距离的变化量越小。The control device according to claim 146, wherein the smaller the difference between the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value, the change amount of the same adjustment position The amount of change in the focus distance is smaller.
根据权利要求145所述的控制装置，其特征在于，对焦距离随着对焦环的转动角度均匀变化。The control device according to claim 145, wherein the focusing distance changes uniformly with the rotation angle of the focus ring.
根据权利要求146所述的控制装置，其特征在于，对焦距离随着对焦环的转动角度非均匀变化。The control device according to claim 146, wherein the focus distance varies non-uniformly with the rotation angle of the focus ring.
根据权利要求149所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值之间的差值越小，相同的转动角度引起的对焦距离的变化量越小。The control device according to claim 149, wherein the smaller the difference between the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value is, the smaller the amount of change in the focus distance caused by the same rotation angle is.
根据权利要求93所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述处理器还用于：The control device according to claim 93, wherein the processor is further configured to:

检测拍摄设备是否发生移动；Detecting whether the shooting device has moved;

如果所述拍摄设备移动，则停止显示所述第一指示标志和/或所述第二指示标志。If the photographing device moves, the display of the first indicator mark and/or the second indicator mark is stopped.
根据权利要求151所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述处理器检测拍摄设备是否发生移动时，具体用于：The control device according to claim 151, wherein when the processor detects whether the photographing device has moved, the method is specifically configured to:

采用所述拍摄设备设置的运动传感器，检测拍摄设备是否发生移动。A motion sensor provided by the photographing device is used to detect whether the photographing device has moved.
根据权利要求152所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述运动传感器包括如下至少一种：A control device according to claim 152, wherein said motion sensor comprises at least one of the following:

陀螺仪、加速度计、惯性测量单元。Gyro, accelerometer, inertial measurement unit.
根据权利要求151所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述处理器检测拍摄设备是否发生移动时，具体用于：The control device according to claim 151, wherein when the processor detects whether the photographing device has moved, the method is specifically configured to:

检测当前图像相对于显示组件是否发生移动。Detects whether the current image has moved relative to the display component.
根据权利要求91所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述处理器还用于：The control device according to claim 91, wherein the processor is further configured to:

接收对当前图像中对焦对象的选择指令。Receives a selection instruction for the focus object in the current image.
根据权利要求155所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述处理器接收对当前图像中对焦对象的选择指令时，具体用于：The control device according to claim 155, wherein when the processor receives a selection instruction for the focused object in the current image, the method is specifically configured to:

接收对当前图像中对焦对象上的对焦点的选择指令。A selection instruction to receive a focus point on a focus object in the current image is received.
根据权利要求155所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述当前图像显示在触摸屏上； The control device according to claim 155, wherein said current image is displayed on a touch screen;

所述处理器接收对当前图像中对焦对象的选择指令时，具体用于：When the processor receives a selection instruction for a focus object in a current image, the processor is specifically configured to:

检测对所述触摸屏上显示的对焦对象的触摸操作。A touch operation on a focus object displayed on the touch screen is detected.
根据权利要求91或92所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述处理器根据所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值进行对焦提示时，具体用于：The control device according to claim 91 or 92, wherein when the processor performs a focus prompt according to the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value, it is specifically used for:

如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则控制拍摄设备上多个发光组件中的第一发光组件发光；Controlling, by the first illumination component, the plurality of illumination components on the photographing device to emit light if the current focus value is less than the focus parameter peak point value;

如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则控制拍摄设备上多个发光组件中的第二发光组件发光；Controlling, by the second illumination component, the plurality of illumination components on the photographing device to emit light if the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value;

如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则控制拍摄设备上多个发光组件中的第三发光组件发光。If the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, controlling the third one of the plurality of light emitting components on the photographing device to emit light.
根据权利要求158所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述第三发光组件位于所述多个发光组件的中间位置，所述第一发光组件和第二发光组件分别位于所述第三发光组件的两侧。The control device according to claim 158, wherein the third lighting component is located at an intermediate position of the plurality of lighting components, and the first lighting component and the second lighting component are respectively located in the third lighting component On both sides.
根据权利要求159所述的控制装置，其特征在于，A control device according to claim 159, characterized in that

当所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值时，所述当前对焦值和所述对焦参数峰点值之间的差值的绝对值越大，所述第一发光组件和所述第三发光组件之间的距离越远；When the current focus value is smaller than the focus parameter peak point value, the absolute value of the difference between the current focus value and the focus parameter peak point value is larger, the first illumination component and the first The further the distance between the three light-emitting components;

当所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值时，所述当前对焦值和所述对焦参数峰点值之间的差值的绝对值越大，所述第二发光组件和所述第三发光组件之间的距离越远。When the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, the absolute value of the difference between the current focus value and the focus parameter peak point value is larger, the second illumination component and the first The further the distance between the three illuminating components.
根据权利要求158-160任一项所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述发光组件包括LED。A control device according to any of claims 158-160, wherein the lighting assembly comprises an LED.
根据权利要求92所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述处理器根据所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值进行对焦提示时，具体用于：The control device according to claim 92, wherein when the processor performs a focus prompt according to the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value, specifically:

通过在显示组件上显示数值以标识所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值之间的差值。A difference between the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value is identified by displaying a value on the display component.
根据权利要求162所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述处理器通过在显示组件上显示数值以标识所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值之间的差值时，具体用于： The control device according to claim 162, wherein said processor is specifically configured to display a value on said display component to identify a difference between said focus parameter peak point value and said current focus value, :

如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则在显示组件上显示负数，所述负数的绝对值表示所述当前对焦值和所述对焦参数峰点值之间差值的绝对值；If the current focus value is less than the focus parameter peak point value, displaying a negative number on the display component, the absolute value of the negative number indicating an absolute value of a difference between the current focus value and the focus parameter peak point value ;

如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则在显示组件上显示正数，所述正数表示所述当前对焦值和所述对焦参数峰点值之间差值的绝对值；If the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, displaying a positive number on the display component, the positive number indicating an absolute value of a difference between the current focus value and the focus parameter peak point value;

如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则在显示组件上显示0。If the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, 0 is displayed on the display component.
根据权利要求162或163所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述数值的绝对值用于表示对焦环需要转动的角度。A control device according to claim 162 or 163, characterized in that the absolute value of said value is used to indicate the angle at which the focus ring needs to be rotated.
根据权利要求91所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述处理器根据所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值进行对焦提示时，具体用于：The control device according to claim 91, wherein when the processor performs a focus prompt according to the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value, specifically:

通过控制拍摄设备的发声组件发出音频信号以标识所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值之间的差值。An audio signal is emitted by controlling a sounding component of the photographing device to identify a difference between the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value.
根据权利要求165所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述处理器通过控制拍摄设备的发声组件发出音频信号以标识所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值之间的差值时，具体用于：如果所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值，则控制拍摄设备的发声组件发出第一音频信号；The control device according to claim 165, wherein said processor outputs an audio signal by controlling a sounding component of the photographing device to identify a difference between said focus parameter peak point value and said current focus value, Specifically, if the current focus value is less than the focus parameter peak point value, controlling the sounding component of the photographing device to emit a first audio signal;

如果所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值，则控制拍摄设备的发声组件发出第二音频信号；If the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, controlling the sounding component of the photographing device to emit a second audio signal;

如果所述当前对焦值等于所述对焦参数峰点值，则控制拍摄设备的发声组件发出第三音频信号或不发声。If the current focus value is equal to the focus parameter peak point value, controlling the sounding component of the photographing device to emit a third audio signal or no sound.
根据权利要求166所述的控制装置，其特征在于，A control device according to claim 166, characterized in that

当所述当前对焦值小于所述对焦参数峰点值时，所述当前对焦值和所述对焦参数峰点值的差值的绝对值越小，所述第一音频信号的音量和/或重复频率越大；When the current focus value is smaller than the focus parameter peak point value, the smaller the absolute value of the difference between the current focus value and the focus parameter peak point value, the volume and/or repetition of the first audio signal The higher the frequency;

当所述当前对焦值大于所述对焦参数峰点值时，所述当前对焦值和所述对焦参数峰点值的差值的绝对值越小，所述第二音频信号的音量和/或重复频率越大。When the current focus value is greater than the focus parameter peak point value, the smaller the absolute value of the difference between the current focus value and the focus parameter peak point value, the volume and/or repetition of the second audio signal The higher the frequency.
根据权利要求166所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述第一音频信号包括负数，所述负数的绝对值表示所述当前对焦值和所述对焦参数峰点值之间差值的绝对值；The control device according to claim 166, wherein said first sound The frequency signal includes a negative value, and the absolute value of the negative number represents an absolute value of a difference between the current focus value and the focus parameter peak point value;

所述第二音频信号包括正数，所述正数表示所述当前对焦值和所述对焦参数峰点值之间差值的绝对值；The second audio signal includes a positive number, and the positive number represents an absolute value of a difference between the current focus value and the focus parameter peak point value;

所述第三音频信号包括0。The third audio signal includes zero.
根据权利要求168所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述负数的绝对值和/或所述正数表示所述对焦环需要转动的角度。The control device according to claim 168, characterized in that the absolute value of the negative number and/or the positive number represents an angle at which the focus ring needs to be rotated.
根据权利要求91所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述处理器根据所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值进行对焦提示时，具体用于：The control device according to claim 91, wherein when the processor performs a focus prompt according to the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value, specifically:

通过控制拍摄设备的震动组件以标识所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值之间的差值。A difference between the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value is identified by controlling a vibration component of the photographing device.
根据权利要求170所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述处理器通过控制拍摄设备的震动组件以标识所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值之间的差值时，具体用于：The control device according to claim 170, wherein the processor is specifically configured to: when the vibration component of the photographing device is controlled to identify a difference between the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value, :

如果所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值不等，则控制拍摄设备的震动组件震动；Controlling the vibration component of the photographing device to vibrate if the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value are not equal;

如果所述对焦参数峰点值和所述当前对焦值相等，则控制拍摄设备的震动组件不震动。If the focus parameter peak point value and the current focus value are equal, the vibration component of the photographing device is controlled not to vibrate.
根据权利要求171所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述震动组件的震动频率与所述当前对焦值和所述对焦参数峰点值之间的差值相关；或/及The control device according to claim 171, wherein a vibration frequency of said vibration component is related to a difference between said current focus value and said focus parameter peak point value; or/and

所述震动组件的震动强度与所述当前对焦值和所述对焦参数峰点值之间的差值相关。The vibration intensity of the vibration component is related to a difference between the current focus value and the focus parameter peak point value.
根据权利要求172所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述当前对焦值和所述对焦参数峰点值的差值的绝对值越小，所述震动组件的震动频率和/或震动强度越大。The control device according to claim 172, wherein the smaller the absolute value of the difference between the current focus value and the focus parameter peak point value, the greater the vibration frequency and/or the vibration intensity of the vibration component .
根据权利要求172所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述当前对焦值和所述对焦参数峰点值的差值的绝对值越大，所述震动组件的震动频率和/或震动强度越大。The control device according to claim 172, wherein the greater the absolute value of the difference between the current focus value and the focus parameter peak point value, the greater the vibration frequency and/or the vibration intensity of the vibration component .
根据权利要求91所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述处理器计算当前图像中对焦对象在合焦时的对焦参数峰点值时，具体用于：The control device according to claim 91, wherein said processor meter When calculating the focus parameter peak value of the focus object in the current image when focusing, it is specifically used to:

对所述当前图像进行图像分析，得到对焦评价函数；Performing image analysis on the current image to obtain a focus evaluation function;

根据对焦评价函数计算当前图像中对焦对象在合焦时的对焦参数峰点值。The focus parameter peak value of the focus object in the current image at the time of focusing is calculated according to the focus evaluation function.
根据权利要求175所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述处理器对所述当前图像进行图像分析，得到对焦评价函数时，具体用于：The control device according to claim 175, wherein the processor performs image analysis on the current image to obtain a focus evaluation function, specifically for:

在频域对所述当前图像进行图像分析，得到对焦评价函数。Image analysis is performed on the current image in the frequency domain to obtain a focus evaluation function.
根据权利要求176所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述处理器在频域对所述当前图像进行图像分析时，具体用于：The control device according to claim 176, wherein when the processor performs image analysis on the current image in the frequency domain, the method is specifically configured to:

基于离散小波变换对所述当前图像进行图像分析。Image analysis is performed on the current image based on a discrete wavelet transform.
根据权利要求176所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述处理器在频域对所述当前图像进行图像分析时，具体用于：The control device according to claim 176, wherein when the processor performs image analysis on the current image in the frequency domain, the method is specifically configured to:

基于离散余弦变换对所述当前图像进行图像分析。Image analysis is performed on the current image based on a discrete cosine transform.
根据权利要求175所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述处理器对所述当前图像进行图像分析，得到对焦评价函数时，具体用于：The control device according to claim 175, wherein the processor performs image analysis on the current image to obtain a focus evaluation function, specifically for:

对所述当前图像进行图像分析，得到所述当前图像的信息熵，将所述信息熵作为对焦评价函数。Performing image analysis on the current image to obtain information entropy of the current image, and using the information entropy as a focus evaluation function.
根据权利要求175所述的控制装置，其特征在于，所述处理器对所述当前图像进行图像分析，得到对焦评价函数时，具体用于：The control device according to claim 175, wherein the processor performs image analysis on the current image to obtain a focus evaluation function, specifically for:

对所述当前图像进行微分运算，得到所述当前图像的灰度差分值，将所述当前图像的灰度差分值作为对焦评价函数。Performing a differential operation on the current image to obtain a grayscale difference value of the current image, and using a grayscale difference value of the current image as a focus evaluation function.
一种拍摄设备，其特征在于，包括：A photographing apparatus, comprising:

机身；body;

光学组件，安装在所述机身，用于采集图像信息；An optical component mounted on the body for collecting image information;

对焦调节组件，与所述光学组件连接，用于调节所述光学组件的焦距；以及a focus adjustment assembly coupled to the optical assembly for adjusting a focal length of the optical assembly;

权利要求91-180任一项所述的控制装置。A control device according to any of claims 91-180.
一种拍摄***，其特征在于，包括：A photographing system, comprising:

机身；body;

天线，安装在所述机身，用于与拍摄设备进行通讯； An antenna mounted on the body for communicating with a photographing device;

对焦调节组件，安装在所述机身，用于调节所述拍摄设备的光学组件的焦距；以及a focus adjustment assembly mounted to the body for adjusting a focal length of an optical component of the photographing device;

权利要求91-180任一项所述的控制装置。 A control device according to any of claims 91-180.